Page 1: Service Manual
Service Manual imagePRESS C1 Series Oct 22 2008...
Page 3 Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
Page 4 Introduction Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Page 5 Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with refer- ence to the timing of operation. In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1 System Construction ..........................1- 1 1.1.1 System Configuration (pickup/delivery accessories) ....................1- 1 1.1.2 System Configuration (printing/transmission accessories)..................1- 1 1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories ..................... 1- 2 1.2 Product Specifications ..........................1- 4 1.2.1 Names of Parts................................ 1- 4 1.2.1.1 External View ...................................
Page 8 Contents Chapter 2 Installation 2.1 Making Pre-Checks ............................ 2- 1 2.1.1 Points to Note About Installation (iR C7000 series)....................2- 1 2.1.2 Unpacking and Checking the Components ......................2- 1 2.1.3 Selecting the Site of Installation..........................2- 4 2.1.4 Checking the Contents.............................2- 5 2.1.5 Checking the Contents.............................2- 8 2.1.6 Checking the Contents............................2- 11 2.1.7 Checking the Contents............................2- 14...
Page 9 Contents 2.2.41 Adjusting Left Margin of Image ........................... 2- 70 2.2.42 Adjusting Margin along Leading Edge of Image ....................2- 71 2.2.43 Cleaning the Charging Assembly ........................2- 71 2.2.44 Cleaning the Charging Assembly ........................2- 75 2.2.45 Other Works ................................ 2- 79 2.2.46 Putting the Rating Plate.
Page 10 Contents 2.13.2 Checking the Parts to Install ..........................2- 101 2.13.3 Installing Procedure ............................2- 101 2.13.4 Installing Procedure ............................2- 108 2.14 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit ......................2- 115 2.14.1 Points to Note at Installation ..........................2- 115 2.14.2 Checking Components............................2- 115 2.14.3 Checking Components............................2- 116 2.14.4 Turning off the Machine .............................2- 117 2.14.5 Installation Procedure ............................2- 117...
Page 11 Contents 4.6.7 Image Data Flow When Using the FAX Receive Function ..................4- 19 4.6.8 Image Data Flow When Using the FAX Receive Function ..................4- 20 4.6.9 Image Data Flow When Using the PDL Function ....................4- 20 4.6.10 Image Data Flow When Using the PDL Function ....................4- 22 4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure .........................4- 23 4.7.1 Controller Box................................
Page 12 Contents Chapter 5 Original Exposure System 5.1 Construction ...................................5-1 5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ........................5-1 5.1.2 Major Components..................................5-1 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................. 5-3 5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................5-3 5.2 Basic Sequence ................................5-4 5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On..........................5-4 5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key ..................
Page 13 Contents 5.4.6 Interface PCB..................................... 5-27 5.4.6.1 Removing the Interface PCB ..................................5-27 5.4.7 Inverter PCB ....................................5-28 5.4.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Inverter PCB (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series)............5-28 5.4.7.2 Removing the Inverter PCB (imagePRESS C1 Series) ..........................5-28 5.4.7.3 Removing the Inverter PCB (imagePRESS C7000 Series) ..........................
Page 14 Contents Chapter 6 Laser Exposure 6.1 Construction ...................................6-1 6.1.1 Specifications/Control Mechanisms/Functions ........................... 6-1 6.1.2 Major Components..................................6-1 6.1.3 Control System Configuration ..............................6-2 6.2 Basic Sequence ................................6-2 6.2.1 Basic Sequence .................................... 6-2 6.3 Various Control................................6-3 6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing............................. 6-3 6.3.1.1 ON/OFF Control ......................................6-3 6.3.1.2 Main Scan Sync Control ....................................6-4 6.3.1.3 Sub Scan Sync Control....................................6-5...
Page 15 Contents Chapter 7 Image Formation 7.1 Construction ...................................7-1 7.1.1 Image Formation Specification List ............................7-1 7.1.2 Main Components ..................................7-2 7.1.3 Main Components ..................................7-2 7.1.4 Charge Specification ................................... 7-3 7.1.5 Charge Specification ..................................7-4 7.2 Image Formation Process...............................7-5 7.2.1 Image Formation Process ................................7-5 7.3 Basic Sequence ................................7-8 7.3.1 When Turning the Power ON ..............................
Page 16 Contents 7.8 Toner Container................................7-52 7.8.1 Outline......................................7-52 7.8.2 Outline......................................7-53 7.8.3 Toner Bottle Presence Detection ............................... 7-54 7.8.4 Toner Bottle Presence Detection ............................... 7-55 7.8.5 Toner Supply....................................7-55 7.8.6 Toner Supply....................................7-57 7.8.7 Toner Level Detection ................................7-58 7.8.8 Toner Level Detection ................................7-59 7.9 Transfer Device ................................
Page 17 Contents 7.14.8.2 Removing the pre-transfer corona assembly...............................7-88 7.14.8.3 After Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly ..........................7-88 7.14.9 Pre-Transfer Corona Pad Holder ............................. 7-88 7.14.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Pre-transfer Corona Assembly Pad Holder ....................7-88 7.14.9.2 Removing the Pre-transfer corona assembly pad folder ..........................7-89 7.14.10 Pre-Transfer Corona Slider ..............................
Page 18 Contents 7.14.27 Intermediate Transfer Belt ..............................7-102 7.14.27.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB ................................. 7-102 7.14.27.2 Removing the ITB ....................................7-102 7.14.28 Primary Transfer Roller ............................... 7-103 7.14.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Transfer Roller ......................... 7-103 7.14.28.2 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller ..............................7-103 7.14.29 Secondary Transfer External Roller.............................
Page 19 Contents Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System 8.1 Construction ...................................8-1 8.1.1 Specification/Control/Function ..............................8-1 8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers ................................8-2 8.1.3 Paper Delivery Path ..................................8-3 8.1.4 Arrangement of Sensors ................................8-4 8.1.5 Distribution of Drives ................................. 8-6 8.1.6 Interval Speed ....................................8-8 8.2 Basic Sequence ................................8-13 8.2.1 Cassette Feeding ..................................
Page 20 Contents 8.10 Parts Replacement Procedure............................ 8-58 8.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit ................................8-58 8.10.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit ..........................8-58 8.10.1.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit ................................8-58 8.10.2 Cassette Heater..................................8-59 8.10.2.1 Removing the Cassette Heater ..................................8-59 8.10.3 Cassette Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller ..........................
Page 21 Contents Chapter9 Fixing System 9.1 Construction ...................................9-1 9.1.1 Specifications/Control/Function ..............................9-1 9.1.2 Major Components (Section) ............................... 9-2 9.1.3 Major Components (Thermistor / Thermal switch) ........................9-3 9.1.4 Major Components (Sensor/Solenoid)............................9-4 9.1.5 Control System Configuration ..............................9-5 9.1.6 Fixing Roller/Belt Drive Control ..............................9-8 9.2 Basic Sequence ................................9-10 9.2.1 At Power-On ....................................
Page 22 Contents 9.7.6 External Heat Roller .................................. 9-44 9.7.6.1 Preparation for Removing the External Heat Roller............................. 9-44 9.7.6.2 Removing the External Heat Roller................................9-44 9.7.6.3 When Replacing the External Heat Roller..............................9-44 9.7.7 Oil Applying Roller ................................... 9-44 9.7.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Oil Coating Roller ............................9-44 9.7.7.2 Removing the Oil Coating Roller .................................
Page 23 Contents 9.7.24.2 Removing the External Heater ..................................9-56 9.7.25 Fixing Web....................................9-57 9.7.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web..........................9-57 9.7.25.2 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web................................9-57 9.7.25.3 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web................................9-58 9.7.25.4 After Replacing the Fixing Cleaning Web..............................9-59 9.7.26 Insulating Bush ..................................9-59 9.7.26.1 Preparation for Removing the Insulating Bush ............................9-59 9.7.26.2 Removing the Insulating Bush ..................................9-59 9.7.26.3 After Replacing the Insulating Bush ................................9-59...
Page 24 Contents Chapter10 Externals and Controls 10.1 Control Panel................................10-1 10.1.1 Overview....................................10-1 10.1.2 LCD Function ..................................10-1 10.1.3 Contrast Adjusting Function ..............................10-1 10.1.4 Function of Control Panel CPU ............................... 10-1 10.2 Counters ..................................10-1 10.2.1 Overview....................................10-1 10.2.2 Count increment timing ................................10-3 10.3 Fans ....................................10-3 10.3.1 Fan......................................
Page 25 Contents 10.5.1.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Process Unit Cover......................... 10-15 10.5.1.14.2 Removing the Process Unit Cover..............................10-15 10.5.2 Hopper Drive Unit ................................. 10-15 10.5.2.1 Preparation for Pulling Up/Removing the Hopper Unit ........................... 10-15 10.5.2.2 Pulling the Hopper Unit Up ..................................10-15 10.5.2.3 Pulling the Hopper Unit Up ..................................
Page 26 Contents 10.5.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Backside Driver PCB ..........................10-35 10.5.20.2 Removing the Backside Driver PCB...............................10-35 10.5.21 Primary Suction Fan ................................10-35 10.5.21.1 Removing the Air Filter ..................................10-35 10.5.22 Ozone Filter (Right) ................................10-36 10.5.22.1 Removing the Ozone Filter (Right).................................10-36 10.5.23 Ozone Filter (Left) ................................
Page 27 Contents Chapter11 MEAP 11.1 MEAP..................................11-1 11.1.1 Changes....................................11-1 11.1.2 Checking the Operating Environment............................. 11-1 11.1.3 Setting Up the Network ................................11-4 11.1.4 Login to SMS ................................... 11-6 11.1.5 Setting the method to login to SMS ............................11-7 11.1.6 Checking Application List ..............................11-11 11.1.7 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application ..........................
Page 28 Contents Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection 12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ............................12-1 12.1.1 Overview....................................12-1 12.1.2 Reader Unit ....................................12-1 12.1.3 Printer Unit....................................12-1 12.2 Durables and Consumables ............................12-4 12.2.1 Overview....................................12-4 12.2.2 Reader Unit ....................................12-4 12.2.3 Printer Unit....................................12-4 12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure........................12-8 12.3.1 General Procedure for Scheduled Servicing ..........................
Page 29 Contents Chapter 13 Standards and Adjustments 13.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ...........................13-1 13.1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1............................13-1 13.1.2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2............................13-1 13.1.3 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3............................13-2 13.1.4 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4............................13-3 13.2 Scanning System ................................13-5 13.2.1 After Replacing the CCD Unit..............................
Page 30 Contents Chapter 14 Correcting Faulty Images 14.1 Making Initial Checks ..............................14-1 14.1.1 Installation Environment................................14-1 14.1.2 Checking of Paper..................................14-1 14.1.3 Checking of Paper Setting ............................... 14-1 14.1.4 Checking of the Durable Parts ..............................14-1 14.1.5 Checking of the Periodically Replaced Parts........................... 14-1 14.1.6 Checking of Each Unit/Checking Item of Each Function System...................
Page 31 Contents 14.3.1.7.4 Hue variation occurs in continuous copy job performed right after replacement of photosensitive drum........14-20 14.3.1.7.5 Faulty hue (yellowish) image is output when copying pinkish original................... 14-20 14.3.1.7.6 Faulty hue image is output after executing quick auto gradation adjustment (printer PASCAL)............ 14-20 14.3.1.7.7 Gradation changes after shading correction............................
Page 32 Contents 14.3.7.5 E020-01A9: ATR shutter malfunctions ..............................14-38 14.3.7.6 E021-0001 appears on machine without Power Supply Unit-S1: Connector or jumper connector is discontinued ........14-38 14.3.7.7 E025-0102: J301D connector of hopper motor has poor contact ......................14-39 14.3.7.8 E025-0004 occurs when replacing drum..............................14-39 14.3.7.9 E025-0102: Connector of Yellow toner supply screw HP sensor (PS68) has poor contact ..............14-40 14.3.7.10 E061-0001/E061-0015/E061-0009: Potential Sensor PCB is faulty ......................14-40 14.3.7.11 E061: How to perform '0' level adjustment after replacing potential sensor PCB..................14-40...
Page 33 Contents Chapter15 Self Diagnosis 15.1 Error Code Table................................15-1 15.1.1 Error Code Table..................................15-1 15.2 Error Code Details ..............................15-3 15.2.1 List of Error Codes................................... 15-3 15.2.2 E602 （HDD/Encryption board error）detail........................15-19 15.3 Error Codes (SEND) ..............................15-23 15.3.1 End Code Items..................................15-23 15.4 Jam Codes ................................15-24 15.4.1 Jam Code (Printer Unit) .................................
Page 34 Contents Chapter 16 Service Mode 16.1 Outline..................................16-1 16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ..............................16-1 16.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ............................16-2 16.1.3 Exiting service modes ................................16-2 16.1.4 Back-Up ....................................16-2 16.1.5 Initial screen..................................... 16-3 16.1.6 Main/intermediate Item Screen..............................16-3 16.1.7 Sub- Item Screen..................................
Page 35 Contents 16.7 TEST (Test Print Mode)............................16-291 16.7.1 COPIER ....................................16-291 16.7.1.1 COPIER List ......................................16-291 16.7.1.2 COPIER List ......................................16-293 16.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ..........................16-295 16.8.1 COPIER ....................................16-295 16.8.1.1 COPIER List ......................................16-295 16.8.1.2 COPIER List ......................................16-305 16.8.1.3 COPIER List ......................................
Page 36 Contents Chapter17 Upgrading 17.1 Outline..................................17-1 17.1.1 Types of System Software ............................... 17-1 17.1.2 Upgrading Overview................................17-2 17.1.3 Outline of the Functions and Operations ..........................17-3 17.1.4 Points to Note at Time of Downloading ..........................17-6 17.2 Making Preparations ..............................17-6 17.2.1 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)......................17-6 17.2.2 Installing the System Software (SST ->...
Page 37 Contents Chapter18 Service Tools 18.1 Service Tools................................18-1 18.1.1 Special Tools.................................... 18-1 18.1.2 Solvents and Oils ..................................18-2...
Page 38 Contents...
Page 39 Chapter 1 Introduction...
Page 41 Contents Contents 1.1 System Construction ..............................1-1 1.1.1 System Configuration (pickup/delivery accessories)........................1-1 1.1.2 System Configuration (printing/transmission accessories)......................1-1 1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories......................... 1-2 1.2 Product Specifications..............................1-4 1.2.1 Names of Parts ..................................... 1-4 1.2.1.1 External View........................................1-4 1.2.1.2 External View........................................1-4 1.2.1.3 Cross Section........................................1-5 1.2.1.4 Cross Section........................................1-7 1.2.2 Using the Machine ..................................
Page 43: System Construction
Chapter 1 1.1 System Construction 1.1.1 System Configuration (pickup/delivery accessories) 0012-1780 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [13] [11] [10] [12] F-1-1 [1] DADF-R1 [2] Finisher-AA1 [3] Saddle Finisher-AA2 [4] Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1/P1 [5] Color Image Reader-H1(Overseas model only)
Page 44: Functions Of Printing/Transmission Accessories
[11] Background Marking Expansion Kit-E1 (license) [12] Encryption Secure Print Kit-A1 (license) [13] IC Card Authentication Function Expansion Kit-A4 (license) 1.1.3 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 0012-1782 1. Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories T-1-1...
Page 45 Chapter 1 Function Accessory needed Background marking printing Background Marking Expansion Kit A1 iR512MB Expansion RAM-C1 Faxing (1-line) Super G3 Fax Board-X1 Faxing (2-line) Multi-fax Board-Y1 Security (HDD deletion + encryption) Security Expansion Board-E1 iR Security Kit-A2 PDF/TIFF/JPEG direct printing LIPS LX Printer &...
Page 46: Product Specifications
Chapter 1 1.2 Product Specifications 1.2.1 Names of Parts 1.2.1.1 External View imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0012-1784 [15] [16] [14] [17] [25] [13] [24] [12] [11] [18] [10] [23] [22] [21] [20] [19] F-1-3 Feeder Control panel Manual feeder tray...
Page 47: Cross Section
Decurler [18] Lower left cover [19] Test button [20] Leakage breaker [21] Cassette heater switch [22] environmental switch [23] Drum temperature switch [24] Lower rear cover [25] Upper rear cover 1.2.1.3 Cross Section imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0012-2502...
Page 48 Chapter 1 [53] [54] [52] [51] [50] [49] [10] [48] [11] [47] [12] [46] [13] [45] [14] [15] [16] [44] [17] [43] [18] [42] [19] [41] [20] [40] [21] [39] [22] [38] [37] [36] [23] [24] [35] [25] [26] [34] [33] [32] [27]...
Page 49: Cross Section
Chapter 1 [41] ITB cleaner assembly [42] Fixing belt [43] Fixing roller [44] Outside heating roller [45] Fixing web [46] Decurler delivery roller [47] Decurler adjusting roller upper [48] Decurler drive roller lower [49] Decurler drive roller upper [50] Decurler adjusting roller lower [51] No.
Page 50: Using The Machine
1.2.2 Using the Machine 1.2.2.1 Power Switch imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 0012-3409 The machine is equipped with 2 switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. The machine is powered when the main power switch is turned on.
Page 51: Points To Note When Turning Off The Main Power Switch
1.2.2.2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch 0012-3410 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch - To turn off the main power switch, hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more so that the shut-down sequence will go on, thereby automatically turning off the main power.
Page 52: User Mode Items
1.2.3 User Mode Items 1.2.3.1 Common Settings 0012-2503 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 * Indicates the default setting. *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. *2 Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays in the host machine and client machines is the same.
Page 53 Chapter 1 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item Initial Functions and Function Order Settings Copy*, Express Copy, Send, Mail Box, Print Job, Scan, MEAP Copy Screen Display Settings Regular Copy Only*1, Regular and Express Copy, Express Copy Only Regular Copy Screen Priority: On*, Off Set System Monitor as the Default Screen On, Off* Set the Default Screen for System Monitor...
Page 54: Timer Settings
Limited Functions Mode*1 On, Off* Erase Remaining Toner Error Message Erase Shutdown Mode Press [Start] Initialize Common Settings Initialize 1.2.3.2 Timer Settings imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0012-2505 * Indicates the default setting. T-1-3 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item...
Page 55: System Control Settings
Print List 1.2.3.5 System Control Settings 0012-2508 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 * Indicates the default setting. *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached to the imagePRESS C1.
Page 56 Chapter 1 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item Use SSL: On, Off* Restrict the Send Function*1 Address Book Password Seven digit number Access Number Management On*, Off Restrict New Addresses On, Off* E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction Restrict Sending to Domains; On, Off* Register, Edit, Erase Allow PDF Send with Expired Certificates On, Off*...
Page 57: Copy Settings
Level, Paper Separation Fan Level Adjustment, Image Location Adjustment, Secondary Transfer Voltage Adjustment Duplicate, Erase, Sort List by 1.2.3.6 Copy Settings imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0012-2509 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. * Indicates the default setting.
Page 58: Mail Box Settings
Gamma Value for YCbCr Received Jobs*1 Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2 1.2.3.8 Mail Box Settings 0012-2511 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 * Indicates the default setting. *1 Information is not delivered if a password is set for the inbox. T-1-9...
Page 59: Address Book Settings
Register Inbox Name: 24 characters maximum Password: Seven digits maximum URL Send Settings Initialize 1.2.3.9 Address Book Settings 0012-2513 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. T-1-10 Item Settings Device...
Page 60: User Administrator Mode
1.2.3.10 User Administrator Mode 0014-8128 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 This part outlines the user administrator mode. User administrator mode provides the adjustment function to User Administrator, who is superior to general user, and the function is classified mainly into 2 settings.
Page 61 Chapter 1 Correction with the print server is valid only when the Image PRESS Server Q1 is mounted. A mode: restriction on the amount of toner deposit is 'Yes'. (Although adjusting the color balance or performing fine adjustment for the density, the amount of toner deposit is restricted.) B mode: restriction on the amount of toner deposit is 'No'.
Page 62: Common Settings
Chapter 1 2. Paper Type Management Settings This feature enables to print with most optimal printing characteristics for each paper type by registering the characteristics of each paper type in the printer engine. Furthermore, parameters such as for curl correction and image position control can be changed for each paper type. This setting can be found in the following menu tree of the panel setting display.
Page 63 Chapter 1 F-1-15 T-1-13 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item Function Display Settings Initial Functions and Function Order Settings Settings: Copy*, Express Copy, Send, Mail Box, Prnt Job, Scan, MEAP, Scan, Printer, Web Access, Hold Copy Screen Display Settings Settings: Regular Copy Only, Regular and Express Copy*, Express Copy Only Set System Monitor as the Default Screen...
Page 64: Timer Settings
Chapter 1 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item Printing Priority Copy: 1*, 2, 3 Printer: 1, 2*, 3 Mail Box, Receive, Other: 1, 2, 3* Register Form for Composition Register, Erase, Check Print, Details Image Priority for Form Composition Auto*, Original Priority, Form Priority Register Characters for Page No./Watermark Register, Edit, Erase Stack Bypass...
Page 65: Adjustment/Cleaning
Chapter 1 1.2.3.13 Adjustment/Cleaning 0020-8588 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ * Indicates the default setting. *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. T-1-15 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item Zoom Fine Adjustment X, Y: -1.0% to +1.0%, in 0.1% increments; 0.0%* Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning*1 Press [Start] Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment*1...
Page 66 Chapter 1 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item Comment 32 characters maximum Dept. ID Management Dept. ID Management On, Off* Register Dept. ID/Password Register, Edit, Erase, Limit Functions Page Totals Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs On*, Off Allow Remote Scan Jobs On*, Off...
Page 67 Chapter 1 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item On, Off* Display Remaining Toner Error Message On*, Off Display ID/User Name USB Settings Use USB Device On*, Off Use USB Host On*, Off Device Information Delivery Settings Register Destinations Auto Search/Register, Register, Details, Erase, Print List Auto Delivery Settings Everyday, Select Days, Off* Add.
Page 68: Copy Settings
Chapter 1 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item Time until Document Auto Erase 0=Off, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*, 7, 30 days Print Upon Storing From the Printer Driver On, Off* On, Off* Restrict Printer Jobs Color Mode for Copy Use Auto-Color Select On*, Off...
Page 69: Mail Box Settings
Chapter 1 Item Settings Device Information Delivery Item Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2 Initialize TX Settings Initialize Common Settings: RX Settings 2-Sided Print On, Off* Select Drawer Switch A: On*, Off Switch B: On*, Off Switch C: On*, Off Switch D: On*, Off...
Page 70: User Administrator Mode
Chapter 1 1.2.3.20 User Administrator Mode 0020-9178 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This part outlines the user administrator mode. User administrator mode provides the adjustment function to User Administrator, who is superior to general user, and the function is classified mainly into 2 settings. 1.
Page 71 Chapter 1 Panel Item Setting Objective Use/Suppl. Service Mode Display Displayed by Tail End White ON*/OFF When paper with curls or paper that tends to curl is used The setting is possibly COPIER > Service Patch Correction for 2-Sided copying, toner may not be applied on the tail set to OFF if Sample H OPTION >...
Page 72 Chapter 1 F-1-18 1-30...
Page 73: User Maintenance
1.2.4.1 Cleaning 0012-2514 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ It is important to keep the machine clean so that its performance may be maintained at a specific level. Advise the user to clean the following parts on a periodical basis (about once a month).
Page 74: Inspection
F-1-19 F-1-20 1.2.4.2 Inspection imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0012-2515 The machine is equipped with a breaker for detection of over-current and leakage current for enhanced safety, and it is important to check and see that the breaker operates properly.
Page 75 Chapter 1 F-1-22 4) Shift the breaker switch [1] back to the ON side. F-1-23 Check to be sure that the breaker switch is on the ON side. If it has stopped between the ON and OFF sides, push it back to the OFF side and then to the ON side. 5) Turn on the main power switch.
Page 76: Inspection
Chapter 1 1.2.4.3 Inspection 0020-3999 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The machine is equipped with a breaker for detection of over-current and leakage current for enhanced safety, and it is important to check and see that the breaker operates properly. Advise the user to check the breaker on a periodical basis (about once a month), and keep a record of inspection.
Page 77 Chapter 1 Check to be sure that the breaker switch is on the ON side. If it has stopped between the ON and OFF sides, push it back to the OFF side and then to the ON side. 5) Turn on the main power switch. 1-35...
Page 78: Safety
0012-1788 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Laser radiation can prove to be harmful to the human body. The machine's laser scanning system is completely sealed by means of a protective housing and external covers so that its light will not leak outside the machine as long as the machine is used normally.
Page 79: Safety Of The Toner
Chapter 1 1.2.5.4 Safety of the Toner 0012-1791 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. Toner in General Toner is a non-toxic material made up of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
Page 80: Machine Specifications
Chapter 1 100% (1:1), reduce (1:0.250, 1:0.500, 1:0.611, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, Reproduction ratio 1:0.865), enlarge (1:1.154, 1:1.224, 1:1.414, 1:2.000, 1:4.000), zoom (1:0.250 to 4.000) (between 25% and 400%, in 1% increments) 11 min 40 sec or less Warm-up time Maximum imaging guarantee area: 307X466.5mm Print area Maximum printing area: 323X476.6 mm (single-sided), 316X476.6 mm (double-sided)
Page 81 Chapter 1 console Body xenon lamp Light source type array (fixed focus) Lens type OPC drum (84-mm dia.) Photosensitive medium light-receiving element (RGB line CCD) Image reading method indirect electrophotography Reproduction method 2-beam laser Exposure method auto or manual Copy density adjustment function corona Charging method...
Page 82: Function List
855mm (W) X 898mm (D) X 1042mm (H) (The control panel is not Dimensions included.) 310kg (approx.; including printer, Reader-H1) Weight 1.2.7 Function List 1.2.7.1 Printing Speed imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0012-1793 T-1-24 Cassette Manual feeder Auto duplexing (cassette) Paper type...
Page 83: Printing Speed
Chapter 1 Cassette Manual feeder Auto duplexing (cassette) Paper type Paper size color mono color mono color mono Heavy paper 3 (216 to 256 g/m2) 279mmX432mm (11"X17") 305mmX458mm (12"X18") if color, 1/3 speed 320mmX450mm (SRA3) 330mmX482mm (13"X19") B4, LGL A4R, LTRR, B5R A4, LTR, B5 A5R, STMTR Transparency...
Page 84: Paper Types
A4, LTR Postcard 4-pane postcard (A4R, non-default) 2-pane postcard (AA5R, non- default) Jpo gvn postcard (A6R, non-default) Tab stock A4, LTR (unit: prints/min) 1.2.7.3 Paper Types 0012-1794 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1-42...
Page 85 Chapter 1 T-1-26 1-43...
Page 86 Chapter 1 Source of paper Paper type Paper size cassette manual feeder Plain paper (64 to 105 g/m2) A3, B4, A4R, 279mmX432mm Eco paper (11"X17")LGL, LTRR Recycled paper Heavy paper 1, 2 (105 to 209 g/m2) A4, B5, LTR A5R, STMTR 305mmX457mm (12"X18"), 330mmX482mm (13"X19"), 320mmX450mm (SRA3) Exective...
Page 87 Chapter 1 Source of paper Paper type Paper size cassette manual feeder Heavy paper 3 A3, B4, A4R, 279mmX432mm (209 to 256 g/m2) (11"X17")LGL, LTRR 305mmX457mm (12"X18"), 330mmX482mm (13"X19"), 320mmX450mm (SRA3) Special paper transparency A4, LTR Jpn postcard gvn, 2-pane, 4-pane label stock A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR, B4 tab stock...
Page 89 Chapter 2 Installation...
Page 91 Contents Contents 2.1 Making Pre-Checks................................2-1 2.1.1 Points to Note About Installation (iR C7000 series) ........................2-1 2.1.2 Unpacking and Checking the Components ..........................2-1 2.1.3 Selecting the Site of Installation ..............................2-4 2.1.4 Checking the Contents ................................. 2-5 2.1.5 Checking the Contents ................................. 2-8 2.1.6 Checking the Contents ................................
Page 92 Contents 2.2.37 Automatic Gradation Correction Setting ..........................2-69 2.2.38 Automatic Gradation Correction Setting ..........................2-70 2.2.39 Checking a Clear Color Image..............................2-70 2.2.40 Checking Image / Operation ..............................2-70 2.2.41 Adjusting Left Margin of Image ............................. 2-70 2.2.42 Adjusting Margin along Leading Edge of Image ........................2-71 2.2.43 Cleaning the Charging Assembly ............................
Page 93 Contents 2.12.2 Turning Off the Host Machine..............................2-98 2.12.3 Installation Procedure ................................2-98 2.13 Installing the Deck Heater............................2-100 2.13.1 Checking the Contents (Heater PCB-F1)..........................2-100 2.13.2 Checking the Parts to Install ..............................2-101 2.13.3 Installing Procedure ................................2-101 2.13.4 Installing Procedure ................................2-108 2.14 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit..........................2-115 2.14.1 Points to Note at Installation..............................
Page 95: Making Pre-Checks
Chapter 2 2.1 Making Pre-Checks 2.1.1 Points to Note About Installation (iR C7000 series) 0016-9175 Color Image Reader-H1 - To install the equipment, the Reader Attachment-A1 is necessary. - When attaching the Platen Cover simultaneously, attach the Platen cover upper right cover in the middle of the equipment installation procedure to improve operating efficiency.
Page 96 Chapter 2 Reader upper right cover Reader right cover Reader retaining plate F (front right) Reader retaining plate R (rear right) 1pc Rubber bush Magnetic catch Flat-head screw (M4X8) [10] Stepped screw (RS tighten; 6.4X2.5) 4pc [11] Screw (TP; M4X6) [12] Screw (RS tighten;...
Page 97 Chapter 2 The subsequent installation procedure is different between imagePRESS C1 Series and imagePRESS C7000 Series. - Refer to sections 1.2 through 1.2.4 for imagePRESS C1 Series. - Refer to sections 1.3 through 1.3.3 for imagePRESS C7000 Series.
Page 98: Selecting The Site Of Installation
2.1.3 Selecting the Site of Installation 0012-5931 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. If possible, check the planned site of installation before delivering the machine. (1) The power supply main plug (back side of the main body), is rated as indicated and the power outlet can be connected exclusively to the machine, is 100V/ 15A or more for 100V machine, 120V to 127V/15.1A or more for 120V machine, 220 to 240V/9.2 or more for 230V machine.
Page 99: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 100 mm or more 2,492 mm 500 mm or more 500 mm or more F-2-5 7. Place the machine on the side of the slope plate where there is a nail hole [1]. Secure the installation space on the side of the nail hole (right) of the slope plate. Pick-up assembly is located on the side of the nail hole (right) of the slope plate.
Page 100 Chapter 2 Box A [A] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] Box B [B] [26] [25] [27] [24] [23] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] Box C [C] [35] [36] [37] [38] [39] [40] [41]...
Page 101 Chapter 2 [17] Screw (TP; M3X8) 3pc. [18] Flat screw 1pc. [19] Screw (W sems; M4X12) 1pc. [20] Arm cover mount 1 1pc. [21] Arm cover mount 2 1pc. [22] Ferrite core 1pc. [23] Developing assembly (Y, M, C, Bk, L (clear)) 5pc.
Page 102: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 2.1.5 Checking the Contents 0020-5576 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The contents are stored in the box A [A], box B [B], box C [C], and cassette [D]. F-2-9...
Page 103 Chapter 2 Box A [A] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] Box B [B] [26] [25] [27] [24] [23] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] Box C [C] [35] [36] [37] [38] [39] [40] [41]...
Page 104 Chapter 2 [17] Screw (TP; M3X8) 3pc. [18] Flat screw 1pc. [19] Screw (W sems; M4X12) 1pc. [20] Arm cover mount 1 1pc. [21] Arm cover mount 2 1pc. [22] Ferrite core 1pc. [23] Developing assembly (Y, M, C, Bk, L (clear)) 5pc.
Page 105: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 2.1.6 Checking the Contents 0020-5577 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The contents are stored in the box A [A], box B [B], box C [C], and cassette [D]. F-2-11 2-11...
Page 106 Chapter 2 Box A [A] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] Box B [B] [26] [25] [27] [24] [23] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] Box C [C] [35] [36] [37] [38] [39] [40] [41]...
Page 107 Chapter 2 [17] Screw (TP; M3X8) 3pc. [18] Flat screw 1pc. [19] Screw (W sems; M4X12) 1pc. [20] Arm cover mount 1 1pc. [21] Arm cover mount 2 1pc. [22] Ferrite core 1pc. [23] Developing assembly (Y, M, C, Bk, L (clear)) 5pc.
Page 108: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 2.1.7 Checking the Contents 0020-5575 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The contents are stored in the box A [A], box B [B], box C [C], and cassette [D]. F-2-13 2-14...
Page 109 Chapter 2 Box A [A] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] Box B [B] [26] [25] [27] [24] [23] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] Box C [C] [35] [36] [37] [38] [39] [40] [41]...
Page 110 Chapter 2 [17] Screw (TP; M3X8) 3pc. [18] Flat screw 1pc. [19] Screw (W sems; M4X12) 1pc. [20] Arm cover mount 1 1pc. [21] Arm cover mount 2 1pc. [22] Ferrite core 1pc. [23] Developing assembly (Y, M, C, Bk, L (clear)) 5pc.
Page 111: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 2.1.8 Checking the Contents 0012-6166 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [21] [18] [19] [20] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36]...
Page 112 Chapter 2 Grip face cover (A) 2pc. [10] Grip face cover (B) 2pc. [11] Touch pen 1pc. [12] Arm cover2 1pc. [13] Lock hinge cover L 1pc. [14] Lock hinge cover R 1pc. [15] Hinge slide cover 1pc. [16] Arm cover 1 1pc.
Page 113: Checking The Contents
Registration for Purchase in USA [10] MEAP Administration Software CD [11] N/W ScanGear CD [12] Installation Check list * Only supports imagePRESS C1V2. (From Body NO : CUFXXXXX) 2.1.9 Checking the Contents 0015-0729 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 2-19...
Page 114 Chapter 2 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [21] [18] [19] [20] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [38] [39] [40] [41] [42] FU5-8540 13 19 330 483 11 16 12 17 SRA3...
Page 115 Chapter 2 [13] Lock hinge cover L 1pc. [14] Lock hinge cover R 1pc. [15] Hinge slide cover 1pc. [16] Arm cover 1 1pc. [17] Arm cover 3 1pc. [18] Arm cover 4 1pc. [19] Arm unit 1pc. [20] Control panel arm unit 1pc.
Page 116: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 2.1.10 Checking the Contents 0015-1445 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [21] [18] [19] [20] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36]...
Page 117 Chapter 2 [11] Touch pen 1pc. [12] Arm cover2 1pc. [13] Lock hinge cover L 1pc. [14] Lock hinge cover R 1pc. [15] Hinge slide cover 1pc. [16] Arm cover 1 1pc. [17] Arm cover 3 1pc. [18] Arm cover 4 1pc.
Page 118: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 2.1.11 Checking the Contents 0015-1466 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [21] [18] [19] [20] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36]...
Page 119 Chapter 2 Grip face cover (A) 2pc. [10] Grip face cover (B) 2pc. [11] Touch pen 1pc. [12] Arm cover2 1pc. [13] Lock hinge cover L 1pc. [14] Lock hinge cover R 1pc. [15] Hinge slide cover 1pc. [16] Arm cover 1 1pc.
Page 120: Checking The Contents
Chapter 2 2.1.12 Checking the Contents 0015-8411 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [21] [18] [19] [20] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36]...
Page 121 Chapter 2 Grip face cover (A) 2pc. [10] Grip face cover (B) 2pc. [11] Touch pen 1pc. [12] Arm cover2 1pc. [13] Lock hinge cover L 1pc. [14] Lock hinge cover R 1pc. [15] Hinge slide cover 1pc. [16] Arm cover 1 1pc.
Page 122: Unpacking And Installation
2.2 Unpacking and Installation 2.2.1 Points to Note Before Starting the Work 0012-6079 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ When installing the machine, keep the following in mind. - If the machine is moved from a cold to warm place, condensation can occur.
Page 123 Chapter 2 4) Hold the grips on the right side (front, rear) of the machine, lift the ma- chine slightly to remove the 2 pads [1] and the plastic bag. Don't incline the machine too much, it could loose its balance. F-2-25 9) Turn the adjusters [1] in the direction shown by the arrow to lock them in place.
Page 124: Mounting Scanning System
Chapter 2 F-2-28 F-2-31 13) Remove the 4 shipping tags [1] from the lower rear right cover. 18) Fit the 2 grips [1] removed in step 10) into the compartment [2]. 14) Open the upper right cover [2] and the lower right cover [3]. F-2-32 19) Attach the lower rear right cover.
Page 125: Locking The Primary Transfer Roller In Place
2.2.4 Locking the Primary Transfer Roller In Place F-2-36 0012-6285 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 3) Close the front door. PRESS C1+ 2.2.5 Decurler points to Note About Installation...
Page 126 Chapter 2 F-2-40 6) Remove the fixing tape [1]. F-2-38 MEMO: When attaching the decurler, adhere the decurler to the the left side of the host machine, and for approximate position, refer to rear cover corner [A], and fit the corner decurler [B] upper approx. 7 mm, inside part approx. 7 F-2-41 7) Attach the decurler [1] in place.
Page 127: Mounting The Delivery Tray
- 1 screw (binding; M4X8) [2] F-2-47 2.2.7 Mounting the Delivery Tray 0012-9033 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ F-2-43 10) Attach the reuse band [3] to the hole [2] of the cable supporting plate [1].
Page 128: Decurler Open / Close Angle Adjustment
6) Close the decurler front cover. Detach the outer delivery roller cover before removing the delivery tray. 2.2.9 Decurler Open / Close Angle Adjustment imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 0015-6364 PRESS C1+ F-2-55 7) Remove the adjusting shaft [1].
Page 129: Preparation For Mounting The Developing Assembly
2.2.10 Preparation for Mounting the Developing Assembly 0012-6724 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull the shutter lever [1] found at the hopper fully toward you.
Page 130 Chapter 2 6) Close the toner replacement cover. 7) Pull the hopper [1] in the direction of the arrow until it stops. F-2-64 9) Disconnect the 6 connectors [1], and free the cable from the cable guide [2] and the wire saddle [3]. F-2-63 Points to Note when Pulling up the Hopper Unit 1, Be sure to check with eyes that the lock arm [1] on the lower left of the...
Page 131 Chapter 2 1. Hold the drum fixing member [3] steady when loosening the shaft of the ITB joint shaft [2]. (Unless the drum fixing member is held down, the shaft is not loosened and rotates with the drum.) 2. Check to see that the fixing member of the connection shaft is removed certainly.
Page 132: Mounting The Balancing Cylinder
Paper is used for the purpose of preventing light-transmittance. F-2-76 F-2-74 2.2.11 Mounting the Balancing Cylinder imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0012-9740 - In order to even the balance inside the rotary, the developing assembly should be mounted by the following step: balancing cylinder [1] >...
Page 133 Chapter 2 F-2-78 5) Attach the balancing cylinder [1] to the developing rotary. Make sure that the pin [2] at the Balancing Cylinder is found in the hole located at the backside of the developing rotary [3]. In the case of attaching the balancing cylinder, make sure not to bump into the ATR sensor shutter [1].
Page 134: Mounting The Balancing Cylinder
Chapter 2 2.2.12 Mounting the Balancing Cylinder 0020-4620 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ - Balancing cylinder [1], is a parts to maintain the balance in the inner Rotary. Make sure to install it before installing the developing assembly. - The position for Balancing cylinder [1] installation is in the area with no toner supply.
Page 135: Mounting The Developing Assembly
The developing rotary must be turned counterclockwise. F-2-88 2.2.13 Mounting the Developing Assembly 0012-9754 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 2-41...
Page 136 Chapter 2 F-2-92 5) Hold the developing assembly so that the developing cylinder is facing up- ward, remove the desiccating agent [1] and the protective member [2]. F-2-89 F-2-93 Keep in mind not to touch the developing cylinder. 6) Manually turning the developing cylinder gear [1] 5 to 6 times in the di- F-2-90 rection of the arrow, to check if there is any scar on its surface and also 3) Open the 2 developing assembly fixing arms [1].
Page 137 Chapter 2 F-2-95 8) Place a piece of A3 paper on a flat surface. Then turn the developing as- sembly upside down and shake off the residual toner in the toner mouth onto the paper. Keep in mind not to touch the developing cylinder [2]. F-2-97 -After attaching the developing assembly, check to see if the hole [2] of the ATR sensor shutter [1] is embossed.
Page 138: Mounting The Developing Assembly
Chapter 2 Balancing Cylinder F-2-98 The developing positioning sheet for each color is attached to [A] of the respective developing rotary. Attach the developing assembly according to each positioning sheet. F-2-99 11) Repeat the step 2) to 10) to set the 4 developing assemblies to the devel- oping rotary.
Page 139 Chapter 2 F-2-103 5) Set an A3-size sheet, and remove the desiccant [1] and protection part [2] in the condition where the developing cylinder of the developing assem- F-2-100 bly is placed on the upper side. Keep in mind not to touch the developing cylinder. F-2-101 3) Open the 2 developing assembly fixing arms [1].
Page 140 Chapter 2 F-2-106 8) Place a piece of A3 paper on a flat surface. Then turn the developing as- sembly upside down and shake off the residual toner in the toner mouth onto the paper. Keep in mind not to touch the developing cylinder [2]. F-2-108 - After attaching the developing assembly, check to see if the hole [2] of the ATR sensor shutter [1] is embossed.
Page 141: Mounting The Process Unit
F-2-110 2.2.15 Mounting the Process Unit Keep in mind not to mix up the harness. 0012-7012 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 1) With lifting the cable [1], attach the developing assembly cover [2]. - 1 screw [3] F-2-114 5) Tighten the 5 screws [1].
Page 142 Chapter 2 F-2-118 9) Connect the 6 connectors [1], and fix it in place with the cable guide [2] F-2-115 and the clamp [3]. 6) Fit the drum fixing member [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-2-116 7) Tighten the 2 process joint shafts [1] and the ITB joint shaft [2]. F-2-119 10) Remove the A3 paper[1].
Page 143 Chapter 2 F-2-124 The left side F-2-122 13) Open the toner replacement cover [1] F-2-123 14) Tighten the 2 hopper fixing screws [1]. The right side F-2-125 15) Fix the 2 harnesses with the clamp [1]. Right side F-2-126 16) Attach the hopper cover (right) [1]. - 1 screw (binding;...
Page 144: Mounting The Process Unit
Chapter 2 F-2-127 F-2-131 17) Open the decurler front cover [1]. 2.2.16 Mounting the Process Unit 0020-5004 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) With lifting the cable [1], attach the developing assembly cover [2]. - 1 screw [3] F-2-128 18) Attach the hopper cover (left) [1] - 1 screw (binding;...
Page 145 Chapter 2 F-2-137 7) Tighten the 2 process joint shafts [1] and the ITB joint shaft [2]. F-2-134 4) Put back the fixing/feeding unit [1]. - Hold the drum fixing member [3] steady when tightening the shaft of the ITB joint shaft [2]. - If the drum fixing member is not held steady, the shaft [2] will rotate without tightening.
Page 146 Chapter 2 10) Remove the A3 paper [1]. F-2-141 11) Shift down the lock lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to release. F-2-144 14) Tighten the 2 hopper fixing screws [1] from each side. <Right side> F-2-142 12) Hold it tight with both hands, and move the hopper assembly [1] down slowly in the direction of the arrow.
Page 147: Mounting The Fixing Assembly
F-2-148 2.2.17 Mounting the Fixing Assembly 17) Open the decurler front cover [1]. 0012-7022 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit [1]. F-2-149 18) Attach the hopper cover (left) [1].
Page 148 Chapter 2 F-2-157 7) Press the two claws [2] and pull out the fixing feed unit to the full length. F-2-154 4) Pick up the lever [1] to open the inside cover [2]. F-2-155 5) Push the 2 fixing members [1] for transportation in the direction of [A], and then release it in the direction of [B].
Page 149: Fitting The Control Panel In Place
17) Put back the fixing/feeding release lever. 18) Close the front door. 2.2.18 Fitting the Control Panel in Place 0012-7275 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Detach the right reader cover [1]. - 3 screws [2] F-2-161 11) Mount the web unit.
Page 150 Chapter 2 F-2-169 6) Fix the arm cover mount 2 [1]. - 1 screw (Binding; M4X10) [2] F-2-167 4) Hook the claw [2] of the control panel arm unit [1], and tighten the screws (binding; M4X10) in the order of the 4 [3] and the 4 [4]. F-2-170 7) Fix the arm cover mount 1 [1].
Page 151 Chapter 2 13) Fit the claw [1] of the arm unit into the hole of the control panel arm unit [2]. F-2-177 F-2-173 14) Turn the arm unit in the direction of the arrow to the position where the 10) Attach the upper right cover [1], which has been detached at step 2). screw hole [1] of the arm unit is aligned with the hole of the control panel - 3 screws [2] arm unit.
Page 152 Chapter 2 20) Fit the shaft [1] of the control panel into the arm unit [2]. F-2-180 17) Run the control panel interface cable [1] through the arm cover 1 [2]. 18) Attach the arm cover 1 [2] while hanging the claw [3] on the cut-off [4] of the arm unit.
Page 153 Chapter 2 1, Make the ferrite core [1] in the position of the chart. F-2-184 22) Tighten the screw (W sems; M4X12) [1] from the back of the control panel. 2, Be sure to adjust the cable length so that the cable [1] is located inside the plate [2].
Page 154: Setting Of Environmental Switch
- 2 cover rubber pieces (Small) [2] F-2-193 2.2.19 Setting of Environmental Switch 0013-9816 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Check that the Environmental switch [1] is ON. F-2-189 27) Attach the lock hinge cover L [1].
Page 155: Turning The Main Power On
[1]. F-2-195 230V 2.2.21 Turning the Main Power ON 9.2A imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0012-7226 230V 120V 1.3A 15.1A Before turning the main power on, be sure to remove the packing materials.
Page 156: Turning The Main Power On
Chapter 2 F-2-201 3) There must be a grounding terminal for the machine. Targets of Grounding - Grounding terminal of power outlet - Grounding terminal of which grounding work (D Type) is properly done. F-2-199 2.2.22 Turning the Main Power ON Do not connect the grounding cord to the gas pipe.
Page 157: Turning The Main Power On
Chapter 2 F-2-203 F-2-205 5) Check the folliwing setting 2) Check the sett of 4-color/5-color model. Service mode: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > CLCONFIG Service mode: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > CLCONFIG Make sure that this setting is set to "0". - In case of 4-color model, make sure that this setting is set to "1".
Page 158: Turning The Main Power On
Chapter 2 F-2-206 F-2-207 3) Check the folliwing setting 3) Check the folliwing setting. Service mode: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > CLCONFIG Service mode: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > CLCONFIG Make sure that this setting is set to "0". Make sure that this setting is set to "0".
Page 159: Turning The Main Power On
2.2.28 Points to Note at the Main Power OFF Make sure that this setting is set to "0". 0018-5931 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 2.2.27 Turning the Main Power ON 0016-9484...
Page 160: Setting The Toner Container
4) Hold the grip, and insert the toner container [1] fully inside. F-2-210 2.2.30 Setting the Toner container 0012-7216 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 1) Take out the toner container from its package that comes with the ma- chine. 2) Open the toner replacement cover [1].
Page 161 Chapter 2 When executing the step 5) and 6), be careful not to touch the shutter [1] found at the bottom of the toner container. 5) Hold the new toner container as shown, and shake it about 10 times as if to rotate it.
Page 162: Setting The Toner Container
F-2-225 7) Repeat the foregoing steps for all colors. 8) Close the toner replacement cover. 2.2.33 Supplying Toner imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0012-7685 MEMO: Do the following steps after the host machine is in standby status. 4) Hold the new toner container as shown, and shake it about 10 times as if to rotate it.
Page 163: Supplying Toner
8) Set other cassettes in the same way. 2.2.35 Setting the Paper Cassette 2.2.36 Setting for K paper 0012-7227 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 0015-8525 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ PRESS C1+ 1) Press the cassette release button, and pull out the cassette toward the front.
Page 164: Automatic Gradation Correction Setting
2.2.41 Adjusting Left Margin of Image ment Settings > Auto Gradation Adjustment. 0012-9075 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ MEMO: When attaching the reader (accessory) at the same time, there are selections...
Page 165: Adjusting Margin Along Leading Edge Of Image
3) Pull the shutter lever [1]found at the hopper fully toward you 2.2.42 Adjusting Margin along Leading Edge of Image 0012-9077 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ Adjusting method of margin along leading edge of image from each pickup slot is described below.
Page 166 Chapter 2 F-2-239 6) Remove the hopper cover (Left) [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-2-242 The left side F-2-240 7) Free the 2 harnesses from the clamp [1] Right Side F-2-241 8) Remove the 2 hopper fixing screws [1] The right side F-2-243 9) Close the toner replacement cover 10) Lift the hopper [1] in the direction of the arrow until it stops...
Page 167 Chapter 2 F-2-245 14) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]. 15) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly [3]. Check the pre-transfer charging wire: if there is any dirt/paper lint attached to it, clean it with alcohol solution. F-2-244 Points to Note when Pulling up the Hopper Unit 1, Be sure to check with eyes that the lock arm [1] on the lower left of the hopper is hooked to the shaft [2] and the hopper unit is locked.
Page 168 Chapter 2 F-2-250 Left Side F-2-248 19) Open the toner replacement cover [1] F-2-249 20) Tighten the 2 hopper fixing screws [1]. Right Side F-2-251 21) Fix the 2 harnesses with the clamp [1]. F-2-252 22) Attach the hopper cover (Right) [1]. - 1 screw [2] 2-74...
Page 169: Cleaning The Charging Assembly
Chapter 2 F-2-253 F-2-257 23) Open the decurler front cover [1]. 29) Close the front door. 2.2.44 Cleaning the Charging Assembly 0020-5006 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Perform the following procedure when image fault (vertical or horizontal lines) occurs. 1) Open the front door.
Page 170 Chapter 2 F-2-261 5) Remove the hopper cover (Right) [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-2-265 <Left side> F-2-262 6) Remove the hopper cover (Left) [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-2-263 7) Free the 2 harnesses from the wire saddle [1]. <Right Side>...
Page 171 Chapter 2 F-2-268 14) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]. 15) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly [3]. Check the pre-transfer charging wire: if there is any dirt/paper lint attached to it, clean it with alcohol solution. F-2-267 Points to Note when Pulling up the Hopper Unit 1.
Page 172 Chapter 2 F-2-273 <Left Side> F-2-271 19) Open the toner replacement cover [1]. F-2-272 20) Tighten the 2 hopper fixing screws [1] from each side. <Right Side> F-2-274 21) Fix the 2 harnesses with the wire saddle [1]. <Right Side> F-2-275 22) Attach the hopper cover (Right) [1].
Page 173: Other Works
29) Close the front door. 2.2.45 Other Works 0014-3000 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1. Service Book Case 1) Attach the service book case to the lower right cover of the host machine.
Page 174: Putting The Rating Plate
2.3.3 Installation Procedure (imagePRESS C1 series) 2.2.46 Putting the Rating Plate. imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ 0016-9166 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) 0016-3331 1) Remove the upper left cover [1]. - For Korea only - 2 stepped screws [2] 1) Put the rating plate [1] to the position as shown.
Page 175 Chapter 2 F-2-290 7) Place the reader unit [1] on the host machine. F-2-286 3) Attach the bush [3] to the reader fixing plate (right front) [1] and the read- er fixing plate (right rear) [2]. In the case of maunting the readr[1], make sure that the left cover(of the main machine)matches to the left reader.
Page 176 Chapter 2 F-2-293 10) Attach the reader fixing plate (front left) [1] and (rear left) [2]. - 2 screw [3] F-2-297 14) Attach the reader right cover [1]. - 3 screws (RS, tightening; M4X8) [2] - 3 cover rubber pieces [3] (Use the cover rubber that comes with the host machine.) F-2-294 11) Secure the reader unit in place.
Page 177: Setting After The Installation (Imagepress C1 Series)
Chapter 2 F-2-304 21) Connect the host machine's 2 power plugs (back, left) to 2 separate power supply systems; then, turn on the main power switch. F-2-300 22) Following the message on the control panel, turn off the main power 17) Connect the connector[1], and fix the reader communication cable[2] in switch, and then turn on the main power switch.
Page 178: Installation Procedure (Imageprss C7000 Series)
Chapter 2 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power of the Host Machine Be sure to turn off the main power in the following order to protect hard disk of the host machine. 1) Press the power switch on control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Follow the instruction on the shutdown sequence screen (the main power switch will go off automatically).
Page 179 Chapter 2 - 2 screw [3] F-2-314 11) Connect the lattice cable [1]. - 2 screws (binding; M3X6) [2] F-2-311 8) After removing the filter [1], remove the sub station upper rear [2]/rear up- per [3] face covers. - 7 screws [4] F-2-315 12) Free the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1] at the connector side only.
Page 180 Chapter 2 F-2-322 F-2-318 19) Place this equipment [1] onto the top board of the substation, then move 15) Attach the grounding wire [1] to be matched with the embossed mark [2]. it to the direction of the arrow and align it to the reader fixing plate left - 1 screw (TP;...
Page 181 Chapter 2 tion of the arrow. - 4 screws (TP; M4X6) [4] Before attaching the reader fixing plate R (rear right), be sure to attach the parts of the DADF-R1 described below. (Reader installation procedure step5 to 20) MEMO: 1. In the case of installing the DADF-R1, be sure to attach the following parts of the DADF-R1 before attaching the reader fixing plate R (rear right) in order to improve operational efficiency.
Page 182 Chapter 2 F-2-333 32) Put the upper rear face cover 3 detached in step 8 into the hole found at the sub station upper rear cover. F-2-331 33) Fix the upper rear face cover 3. 30) Attach the reader right cover [1]. <With ADF>...
Page 183 Chapter 2 F-2-336 35) Remove the 3 mirror retaining screws [1]. F-2-338 41) Detach the main controller cover 2 [1]. Make sure to store the 3 mirror fixing screws [1] surely because they are - 10 screws [2] required when carrying. F-2-339 42) Detach the controller PCB guide [1].
Page 184 Chapter 2 Make sure that the S-B board is inserted toward the rear side properly. F-2-341 44) Attach the 2 S-B board fixing plates [2] to the S-B board [1]. - 2 screw (TP; M3X6) [3] F-2-345 48) Attach the controller PCB guide [1]. - 4 screws [2] Be sure to check that the LAN-bar-B PCB [3] has surely been secured after securing the controller PCB guide [1] with the screw.
Page 185 Chapter 2 F-2-351 56) Remove the Main-Station Rear Upper Cover 2 left cover [1]. - 3 screws [2] F-2-347 52) Attach the 3 wire saddles [1]. F-2-352 57) Attach the service label [1] to the Main-Station Rear Upper Cover 2. F-2-348 53) Secure the cable [1] with the 3 wire saddles [2].
Page 186: Setting After The Installation(Imagepress C7000 Series)
2.5.5 Making a Check Using the Remote Host Address 5) Perform shutdown sequence to turn off the power. 0012-9111 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 6) Turn on the main power of the machine. PRESS C1+ 2.4.3 Setting After the Installation(imagePRESS C7000...
Page 187: Installing The Card Reader
- Enter the lowest number of those to be used by the user. 0013-4823 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- - As many as 1000 numbers (i.e., cards) may be used starting with the PRESS C1+ number entered here.
Page 188 Chapter 2 6) Put the cable [1] through the hole [2] of the card reader mounting base; then, fix it to the card reader [3] and the card reader mounting base [4]. - 1 toothed washer [5] - 1 screw (TP; M4x8) [6] F-2-357 3) Detach the hopper cover (Right) [1].
Page 189: Installation Procedure In The Imageware Accounting Manager (Henceforth: Iwam) Environment
7) Go through the shut-down sequence to turn off the power. 2.9 Installing the Original Tray 2.9.1 Checking the Contents 0015-0630 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ <Document Tray-J1> F-2-364 11) Attach the hopper cover (Right) removed in step 3).
Page 190: Checking The Contents
[4]* Stepped screw (M4) 2 pc. 2.10.1 Checking the Contents * Not used in this host machine. imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 0013-6441 PRESS C1+ 2.9.4 Installing the Document Tray 0013-7488 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- <Platen Cover Type K>...
Page 191: Installation Procedure
1 pc. 2.10.2 Installation Procedure Control key 1 pc. 0013-6474 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- Screw (Binding; M4X6) 1 pc. PRESS C1+ 1) Mount the Platen cover upper right cover [1]. 2.11.2 Turning Off the Machine - 1 screw (RS tightening;...
Page 192: After Installing The Key Switch Unit
2.12 Installing the Reader Heater 2.12.1 Checking the Parts 0014-7008 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ F-2-377 Prepare the following parts because each part of the heater PCB is assigned 4) Fit the key switch unit [1] in the plate [2] in the direction of an arrow.
Page 193 Chapter 2 F-2-382 F-2-384 6) Attach the heater harness retainer [1]. - 1 screw (RS tightening; M4X8) [2] When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass surface. When dirt is attached, clean the glass with lint-free paper. F-2-385 7) Move the mirror 1 base [1] in the left direction until it stops.
Page 194: Installing The Deck Heater
2.13.1 Checking the Contents (Heater PCB-F1) 0013-7786 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Every components of the cassette heater unit (heater PCB-F1) are supplied as service parts, so have the following parts on hand.
Page 195: Checking The Parts To Install
2.13.2 Checking the Parts to Install 0013-7788 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Every components of the cassette heater unit (heater PCB-F1) are supplied as service parts, so have the following parts on hand.
Page 196 Chapter 2 1. Installing to the paper deck When installing the heater to the paper deck, take the following precautions. a. The AC power plug of the host machine must have been removed from the outlet. b. Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck. c.
Page 197 Chapter 2 F-2-395 5) Remove three screws [1] and a connector [2], and then detach the front-upper cover [3]. F-2-396 6) Remove two screws [1], and then detach the top cover [2]. F-2-397 7) Atach the supplied cable protection bushing [1] into the hole [2] on the top panel of the paper deck. 2-103...
Page 198 Chapter 2 F-2-398 8) Place the heater unit [1] under the top panel [2] of the paper deck, and then take the connector [3] out from the hole [4] on the top plate. 9) Insert two hooks [5] of the heater unit [1] into the holes [6] on the top plate of the paper deck, and then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck using a screw with toothed washer [7].
Page 199 Chapter 2 2. Connecting to the host machine. 1) Remove screw [2] to remove the blind plate [1] from the power core mount of the papar deck. F-2-401 2) Install the supplied AC input connector [1] in two steps ([A] > [B]). F-2-402 3) Using two binding screws (M4X4) [1], install the relay hareness unit [2] to the rear side panel [3] of the paper deck.
Page 200 Chapter 2 F-2-403 6) Connect the connector at one end of the AC cord to the power cord mount of the heater. 7) Remove eight screws [1], and then detach the rear-lower cover [2] of the host machine. F-2-404 8) Remove two screws [1] at the lower right of the back of the host machine to remove the blind plate [2]. 2-106...
Page 201 Chapter 2 F-2-405 9) Insert the AC cord [1] into the hole of the cord mount [2], and then secure the ground cable [3] to the cord mount using a screw with toothed washer. 10) Secure the AC cord [1] to the cord mount using a screw [5] with flat spring . F-2-406 11) Hang the left-hand hook [1], and then secure the cord mount [3] to the host machine using two binding screws (M4X4) [2].
Page 202: Installing Procedure
[2]: Paper deck [A]: Front 2.13.4 Installing Procedure imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 0013-8027 1. Installing to the paper deck When installing the heater to the paper deck, take the following precautions.
Page 203 Chapter 2 F-2-409 2) Release the paper deck [1] from the host machine, and then press down the latch plate [2] of the paper deck housing with your finger to open the housing [3]. (A: Rear, B: Front) F-2-410 3) Remove three screws [1], and then detach the right cover [2] of the paper deck to the direction of the arrow shown. F-2-411 4) Remove four screws [1] and two other screws [2], and then detach the rear cover [3] of the paper deck.
Page 204 Chapter 2 F-2-412 5) Remove three screws [1] and a connector [2], and then detach the front-upper cover [3]. F-2-413 6) Remove two screws [1], and then detach the top cover. F-2-414 7) Attach the supplied cable protection bushing [1] to the hole [2] on the top panel of the paper deck. 2-110...
Page 205 Chapter 2 F-2-415 8) Place the heater unit [1] under the top panel [2] of the paper deck, and then take the connector [3] out from the hole [4] on the top plate. 9) Insert two hooks [5] of the heater unit [1] into the holes [6] on the top plate of the paper deck, and then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck using a screw with toothed washer [7].
Page 206 Chapter 2 2. Connecting to the Host Machine 1) Remove screw [2] to remove the blind plate [1] from the power cord mount of the paper deck. F-2-418 2) Install the supplied AC input connector [1] in two steps ([A] > [B]). F-2-419 3) Secure the ground cable [1] using the screw with toothed washer [2].
Page 207 Chapter 2 F-2-421 7) Connect the connector at one end of the AC cord to the power cord mount of the heater. 8) Remove eight screws [1], and then detach the rear-lower cover [2] of the host machine. F-2-422 9) Remove two screws [1] at the lower right of the back of the host machine to remove the blind plate [2]. 2-113...
Page 208 Chapter 2 F-2-423 10) Insert the AC cord [1] into the hole of the cord mount [2], and then secure the ground cable [3] to the cord mount using a screw with toothed washer [4]. 11) Secure the AC cord [1] to the cord mount using a screw [5] with flat spring. F-2-424 12) Hang the left-hand hook [1], and then secure the cord mount [3] to the host machine using two binding screws (M4X4) [2].
Page 209: Installing The Voice Guidance Kit
[A]: Front 2.14 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit 2.14.1 Points to Note at Installation imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 0013-6681 In order to install this machine, 'Voice Guidance Attachment-B1' is required. 2.14.2 Checking Components...
Page 210: Checking Components
Chapter 2 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] F-2-427 Speaker Unit (Upper) 1pc. Speaker Unit (Lower) 1pc. [3]*1 Cable (1300mm) 1pc. Cable (1850mm) 1pc. Cord Guide 7pc. Voice Board 1pc. (this machine requires 3 cord guides) [7]*1 Voice Board Face Plate 1pc.
Page 211: Turning Off The Machine
2pc. 2.14.4 Turning off the Machine 0013-5536 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ See the host machine installation [Points to note at the main power OFF]. 2.14.5 Installation Procedure imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 0013-5537 1.
Page 212 Chapter 2 F-2-431 2) Detach the rear upper cover [1]. - 9 screws [2] F-2-432 3) Detach the panel mount cover [1] on the left upper cover (rear). - 1 Screw [2] F-2-433 4) Remove the grounding wire [1], and detach the harness support plate [2]. - 2 screws [3] F-2-434 2-118...
Page 213 Chapter 2 5) Detach the harness support plate [2] from the reuse band[1]. F-2-435 6) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1]. F-2-436 7) Detach the left upper cover (rear) [1]. - 2 screws [2] F-2-437 8) Detach the grounding plate [1]. - 3 screws [2] 2-119...
Page 214 Chapter 2 F-2-438 9) Loosen the 10 screws [1] on the controller box cover, and then remove the 6 screws [2]. F-2-439 10) Slide the controller box cover [1] in the direction of [A] to detach it. F-2-440 11) Detach the face cover plate [1]. (The face cover plate detached here will not be used hereafter.) - 2 screws [2] F-2-441 12) Attach the voice board face plate [2] onto the voice board [1].
Page 215 Chapter 2 F-2-442 13) The slide switch SW 1 on the voice board is set 33MHz as a default. Change the switch to 66MHz. 66MHz F-2-443 The purpose of the slide switch SW 1 on the voice board is to change the frequency (33MHz/66MHz) according to the PCI bus transfer rate. When the settings of the transfer rate and the switch are inappropriate, the voice is not played properly, resulting in catch during the play of the voice etc.
Page 216 Chapter 2 F-2-444 15) Fix the voice board [1] in place by the 2 screws [2] removed in the step 11). F-2-445 16) Attach the parts that were detached in the earlier steps. - Left upper cover (rear) - 5 connectors - Harness support plate - Panel mount cover - Controller box cover...
Page 217 Chapter 2 F-2-447 19) Attach the option stay B [1]. - 2 screws [2] (binding; M4X6) F-2-448 20) Mount the speaker unit (lower) [1]. - 2 screws (W, sems; M4x16) [2] (Use the screws included in the 'Voice Guidance Attachment-B1'.) F-2-449 21) Mount the speaker unit (upper) [1] onto the speaker unit (lower), and then fix it in place by the screw (binding;...
Page 218 Chapter 2 F-2-450 22) Detach the cover [1] of the cord guide. F-2-451 23) Attach the released paper of the cord guide [1] onto the position shown in the figure. Right side --- 2 places F-2-452 Back side --- 1 place F-2-453 24) Connect the cable [2] with the speaker unit [1].
Page 219 Chapter 2 F-2-454 25) Lead the cable [1] along the cord guide [2], and then attach the cord guide cover [3]. F-2-455 26) Lead the cable [1] along the cord guide [2], and then attach the cord guide cover [3]. Be sure that the cable is led under the reader power supply cable [4].
Page 220 Chapter 2 F-2-457 28) Insert the cable [1] into the voice board terminal [2]. F-2-458 29) Fix the redundant cable [1] in place by the 2 wire saddles [2]. Be sure not to let the cable slacken. F-2-459 30) Insert the 2 power supply plugs of the main body (1 on the backside of the machine, 1 on the left side of the machine) into 2 independent outlets from different power sources, and then turn on the main power.
Page 221: Installing The Printer Cover
Chapter 2 2.15 Installing the Printer Cover 2.15.1 Points to Note About Installation 0014-5355 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) Before mounting the decurler, install the this equipment. 2.15.2 Checking the Contents 0012-7960 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) <Printer Cover-A1>...
Page 222: Turning Off The Machine
4 pc. [12] Screw (RS tightening; M4X8) 12 pc. 2.15.3 Turning Off the Machine imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) 0012-9425 See the host machine installation [Points to note at the main power OFF]. 2.15.4 Installation Procedure 0012-7961 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) 1) Remove the upper left cover [1].
Page 223 Chapter 2 F-2-464 5) Mount the reader unit fixing plate (rear right) [1]. - 2 screws (TP; M4X6) [2] F-2-465 6) Place the dummy reader unit for printer [1] on the Host machine. F-2-466 7) Match the screw hole [1] of the Dummy reader unit for printer and the screw hole [2] of the reader unit fixing plate. F-2-467 8) Fit the Rubber bush [3] to the reader unit fixing plate (front left [1], rear left [2]) removed in step 2).
Page 224 Chapter 2 F-2-468 9) Mount th reader unit fixing plate (front left [1], rear left [2]). - 2 screws [3] F-2-469 10) Fix the dummy reader unit for printer in place. - 4 stepped screws (RS tightening; 6X9 dia.) [1] Left Side F-2-470 Right Side...
Page 225 Chapter 2 F-2-472 13) Remove the 2 screws [2] of the hopper cover (upper) [1] to slide it. F-2-473 14) After four places of claw [1] are matched, printer upper cover [2] is installed. - 4 screws (RS tightening; M4X8) [2] F-2-474 15) Secure the toner replacement cover [1] in place.
Page 226: Installing The Serial Interface Kit
Chapter 2 F-2-476 18) Mount the Reader unit face cover [1] - 2 screws (binding; M3X6) [2] F-2-477 19) Mount the reader unit right cover [1]. - 3 screws (RS tightening; M4X8) [2] - 3 cover rubber pieces [3] (Use the cover rubber that comes with the host machine.) F-2-478 2.16 Installing the Serial Interface Kit 2.16.1 Points to Note About Installation...
Page 227: Turning Off The Machine
Chapter 2 [10] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [11] F-2-479 Coin vender I/F PCB unit 1 pc. Coin vender I/F BOX cover 1 pc. Coin vender I/F BOX joint mount 1 pc. Serial RS main L cable 1 pc. [5]*1 Serial RS main S cable 1 pc.
Page 228 Chapter 2 F-2-481 2) Remove the 3 cover rubber pieces [1]. F-2-482 3) Detach the reader right cover [1]. - 3 screws [2] F-2-483 4) Remove the 4 cover rubber pieces [1] (2 of removed cover rubber pieces will not be used.). F-2-484 5) Detach the upper right cover [1].
Page 229 Chapter 2 6) Using nippers cut off the face plate [2] of the upper right cover [1]. Cut off the part [A] so that there are not burrs. F-2-486 7) Free the cable [2] from the edge saddle [1]. F-2-487 8) Disconnect the connecter (5-pin side) [1] from the relay connecter.
Page 230 Chapter 2 10) Secure the cable [1] with the edge saddle [2]. F-2-490 11) Pull out the serial RS main L cable [2] through the cut-off [1] and then attach the upper right cover [3]. - 2 screws [4] F-2-491 12) Attach the 2 cover rubber pieces [1].
Page 231 Chapter 2 F-2-493 16) Attach the option Stay B [1]. - 2 screws (biding; M4X6) [2] F-2-494 17) Attach the coin vendor I/F PCB unit [2] to the coin vendor I/F Box joint mount [1]. - 2 screws (biding; M3X6) [3] F-2-495 18) Attach the coin vendor I/F Box joint mount [1] to the host machine.
Page 232 Chapter 2 F-2-497 20) Slide the cable guide cover [1] and remove it. F-2-498 21) Peel the release paper on the 4 cable guides [1] and attach it at the position shown in the figure. F-2-499 22) Insert the connector [1] of the serial RS main L cable, and attach the reuse band [2]. F-2-500 23) Fix the serial RS main L cable [1].
Page 233 Chapter 2 F-2-501 24) Put the serial RS main L cable [1] through the 4 cable guides [2] and attach the 4 cable guide covers [3]. F-2-502 25) Attach the coin vendor I/F Box cover [1]. - 4 screws [2] (Bind; M3X6) F-2-503 2-139...
Page 235 Chapter 3 Basic Operation...
Page 237: Construction
Contents Contents 3.1 Construction ...................................3-1 3.1.1 Function Configuration ................................3-1 3.1.2 Function Configuration ................................3-2 3.1.3 Main PCB Connection ................................. 3-3 3.1.4 DC Controller....................................3-4...
Page 239: Function Configuration
3.1.1 Function Configuration 0012-8809 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The copier is broadly divided into the reader assembly, the printer assembly, and the system assembly. The printer assembly, a main part of the copier, consists of five system blocks: Laser exposure, Image formation, Pickup/Feed, Fixing/Delivery and Printer control.
Page 240: Dc Controller
Chapter 3 3.1.2 Function Configuration 0020-3876 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The copier is broadly divided into the reader assembly, the printer assembly, and the system assembly. The printer assembly, a main part of the copier, consists of five system blocks: Laser exposure, Image formation, Pickup/Feed, Fixing/Delivery and Printer control. Reader Printer [23]...
Page 241: Main Pcb Connection
Chapter 3 3.1.3 Main PCB Connection 0012-8820 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Connections between main PCBs are shown in the figure below. J4017 J4018 J134 J140 J4019 J4020 J141 J4021 J142 J261...
Page 242 Chapter 3 3.1.4 DC Controller 0012-8824 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The function configuration of DC Controller PCB is shown below. IC28 IC29 IC46 IC52 IC262 IC36 IC270 BAT1 F-3-4 BAT1 (Lithium battery)
Page 243 Chapter 3 IC46 BAT1 (RAM) IC52 IC227 IC36 (Flash-ROM) (CPU) IC28 (PWM-IC1) IC29 IC270 IC262 (PWM-IC2) (ASIC2) (ASIC1) F-3-5 [1] Various HVTs [2] Fixing assembly [3] Various Accessories (Side paper deck, Finisher, etc.) [4] Various Loads (Motor, Sensor, Clutch, Solenoid) [5] Main controller PCB [6] Laser driver PCB [7] BD PCB...
Page 245 Chapter 4 Main Controller...
Page 247 Contents Contents 4.1 Construction ...................................4-1 4.1.1 Configuration and Functions................................ 4-1 4.1.2 Configuration and Functions................................ 4-2 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry .........................4-4 4.2.1 Main Controller Circuit Board (MAIN) ............................4-4 4.2.2 Main Controller Circuit Board (MAIN) ............................4-6 4.2.3 SRAM Circuit Board ................................... 4-7 4.3 Start-Up Sequence................................4-7 4.3.1 Overview......................................
Page 249: Construction
Chapter 4 4.1 Construction 4.1.1 Configuration and Functions 0013-0326 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 The Main Controller primarily has the following configuration and functions. T-4-1 PC Board Name Function Main Controller Circuit Board (MAIN) System control, memory control, and printer output image processing control...
Page 250: Configuration And Functions
Chapter 4 [11] [10] F-4-1 Reader Unit DC Controller Circuit Board Printer Unit 4.1.2 Configuration and Functions 0020-4000 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The Main Controller primarily has the following configuration and functions. T-4-2 PC Board Name Function Main Controller Circuit Board (MAIN) System control, memory control, and printer output image processing control Panel I/F Circuit Board Operation panel interface control...
Page 251 Chapter 4 PC Board Name Function Relay Circuit Board (Gu-short) Bus connections (when EFI controller is not connected) Main Controller Circuit Board (SUB O-B) EFI controller connection Main Controller Circuit Board (SUB S-B, ZJ-A) Scanner interface, scanner image processing (resolution conversion, image rotation, compression/decompression) Main Controller Circuit Board (SUB LAN-bar-A) LAN connection, HDD controller, HDD power supply...
Page 252: Construction Of The Electrical Circuitry
Chapter 4 Printer Unit 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry 4.2.1 Main Controller Circuit Board (MAIN) imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0013-0329 The main jacks of the Main Controller Circuit Board (MAIN) are shown below. J1036 J1009 J1008 J1010...
Page 253 Chapter 4 IC No. Function IC2(ASIC) Operation panel control, various I/O control IC10/IC11(SDRAM) CPU work memory built into IC2...
Page 254: Main Controller Circuit Board (Main)
Chapter 4 4.2.2 Main Controller Circuit Board (MAIN) 0020-4001 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The main jacks of the Main Controller Circuit Board (MAIN) are shown below. J1036 J1009 J1008 J1010 J1011 J1012 J1013 IC10 IC11 J1024 J1034 J1001 J1002 F-4-4 T-4-5...
Page 255: Sram Circuit Board
Chapter 4 4.2.3 SRAM Circuit Board 0014-1298 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Primary control of the SRAM Circuit Board is shown below for each IC. Front Back BAT1 F-4-5 T-4-7 IC No.
Page 256 Chapter 4 Progress bar F-4-7 1. Boot Program (Section 1) The boot program is executed by the CPU on the Main Controller Circuit Board when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. A check is made of image memory (DDR-SDRAM) and HDD status. An error code is displayed if any abnormality is detected.
Page 257: Actions When Hdd Error
F-4-9 4.4 Actions when HDD Error 4.4.1 E602 Details 0014-1301 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ E602-XXYY - When XX = 00 CHK-TYPE = COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>CHK-TYPE (Specifies the partitions to be formatted by HD-CLEAR) HD-CHECK = COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>HD-CHECK...
Page 258 Chapter 4 T-4-8 Description Remedy 1. Turn the Main Power Switch OFF and check the HDD cable connection. After confirmation, turn the Main Power Switch ON. HDD cannot be recognized. Boot 2. After turning the Main Power Switch ON, check that the HDD spins up and that 5 V/12 V power is being partition (BOOTDEV) not found supplied.
Page 259 Chapter 4 T-4-9 YY=1 YY=0 0, 12, HDD Format YY=0 YY=0 YY=1 YY=1 0, 01, 1, 21 3, 25 02, 04 23, 24 Correspon During Normal ding Contents Generated at Startup Operation Partition HDD Format HDD Format HDD Format Reme Reme Reme Reme...
Page 260: Image Processing
2. If the above does not correct the problem, the HDD may be assumed to be damaged, so replace the HDD and reinstall the system. 4.5 Image Processing 4.5.1 Image Flow Overview 0014-1302 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Image flow when using the functions of this unit is shown below. 4-12...
Page 261: Reader Input Image Processing
F-4-10 4.5.2 Reader Input Image Processing 0014-1303 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 Image processing of image data (RGB data) scanned by CCD is performed by the Main Controller Circuit Board (SUB SJ-A, SUB R-A, SUB PF-A). Reader Unit Main Controller Circuit...
Page 262: Printer Output Image Processing
F-4-12 4.5.4 Printer Output Image Processing imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 0014-1304 The Main Controller performs image processing on image data received from the Reader Unit so that it may be output to the printer.
Page 263: Block For Compression, Expansion, And Editing Processing
To DC Controller of image data Circuit Board - Video count F-4-13 4.5.5 Block for Compression, Expansion, and Editing Processing 0014-1305 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 Compression, expansion, and editing processing are performed on the Main Controller Circuit Board. 4-15...
Page 264: Block For Compression, Expansion, And Editing Processing
Binarization processing JPEG compression JPEG expansion DDR-SDRAM F-4-15 4.6 Flow of Image Data 4.6.1 Image Data Flow When Using the Copy Function 0014-1306 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 Image data flow when using the copy function is shown below. 4-16...
Page 265: Image Data Flow When Using The Copy Function
JPEG decompression Magnification JPEG compression Rotation Color conversion DDR-SDRAM F-4-17 4.6.3 Image Data Flow When Using the BOX Function 0014-1307 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 The flow of image data when using the BOX function is shown below. 4-17...
Page 266: Image Data Flow When Using The Box Function
Image Area Signal JPEG decompression Resolution conversion JPEG compression Rotation DDR-SDRAM F-4-19 4.6.5 Image Data Flow When Using the SEND Function imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0014-1308 The flow of image data when using the SEND function is shown below. 4-18...
Page 267: Image Data Flow When Using The Send Function
Binarization processing Color conversion MMR compression DDR-SDRAM F-4-21 4.6.7 Image Data Flow When Using the FAX Receive Function imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 0014-1309 The flow of image data when using the FAX receive function is shown below. 4-19...
Page 268: Image Data Flow When Using The Fax Receive Function
DC Controller Main Controller Resolution conversion Rotation DDR-SDRAM FAX Unit F-4-23 4.6.9 Image Data Flow When Using the PDL Function 0014-1310 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 The flow of image data when using the PDL function is shown below. 4-20...
Page 269 Chapter 4 Direct Print Expansion Kit - F1 DISPLAY LIST Data LIPS LX LIPS Data LIPS V/PS Expansion Kit - P1 PS Print Server PS Data Unit - Q1 Main Controller Main Controller Circuit Board Circuit Board (SUB O-B) (SUB LAN-bar-A) Main Controller Circuit Board DC Controller (MAIN) + (SUB R-A) + (SUB PF-A) + (SUB DE-A)
Page 270: Image Data Flow When Using The Pdl Function
Chapter 4 4.6.10 Image Data Flow When Using the PDL Function 0020-4103 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The flow of image data when using the PDL function is shown below. Direct Print Expansion Kit - F1 DISPLAY LIST Data LIPS LX LIPS Data LIPS V/PS Expansion Kit - P1...
Page 271: Parts Replacement Procedure
4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure 4.7.1 Controller Box 4.7.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Controller Box 0013-9384 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Detach the left rear upper cover. 2) Detach the rear upper cover.
Page 272: Main Controller Pcb (Main)
4.7.2 Main Controller PCB (main) 4.7.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Main Controller 0013-9390 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Detach the left rear upper cover. 2) Detach the rear upper cover.
Page 273: Removing The Main Controller Pcb (Main)
Chapter 4 F-4-40 3) Remove the main controller PCB (sub R-A) [1], the main controller PCB (PPF-A, DQE-A) [2], the relay PCB (GU-SHORT) [3], the main control- ler PCB (sub S-B, sub ZJ-A) [4], the main controller PCB (sub LAN- BAR-A) [5].
Page 274: Preparation For Removing The Hdd
F-4-43 4.7.3 HDD 4.7.3.1 Preparation for Removing the HDD 0013-9322 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Detach the left rear upper cover. 2) Detach the rear upper cover. 4.7.3.2 Removing the HDD...
Page 275 Chapter 4 great care after it has been removed. When placing the HDD on the floor or on a table, try to be as gentle as pos- sible. It is better to place the HDD on a thick blanket or other shock absorbent material, rather than directly onto a surface.
Page 276 Chapter 5 Original Exposure System...
Page 278 Contents Contents 5.1 Construction ...................................5-1 5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions ........................5-1 5.1.2 Major Components..................................5-1 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................. 5-3 5.1.4 Reader Controller PCB ................................5-3 5.2 Basic Sequence ................................5-4 5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On..........................5-4 5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key ..................
Page 279 Contents 5.4.6 Interface PCB..................................... 5-27 5.4.6.1 Removing the Interface PCB ..................................5-27 5.4.7 Inverter PCB ....................................5-28 5.4.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Inverter PCB (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series)............5-28 5.4.7.2 Removing the Inverter PCB (imagePRESS C1 Series) ..........................5-28 5.4.7.3 Removing the Inverter PCB (imagePRESS C7000 Series) ..........................
Page 280: Construction
Chapter 5 5.1 Construction 5.1.1 Specifications, Control Mechanisms, and Functions 0012-5813 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The original scanning system is characterized by the following specifications, control mechanisms, and functions: T-5-1 Item Description Scanning lamp xenon lamp...
Page 281 Chapter 5 Scanner motor Original size sensor Signal size sensor (inch-configuration sensor) (A/B-configuration) Reader controller Interface CCD unit Inverter PCB Scanner HP sensor Original scanning lamp Anti-condensation sensor F-5-1 Image HP leading edge Stream reading position Size detection (start position) Original Copyboard glass No.
Page 282: Construction Of The Control System
Chapter 5 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System 0012-9668 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The following shows the construction of the control system of the original exposure system: Scanner motor Scanner motor drive control To ADF Reader controller...
Page 283: Basic Sequence
Chapter 5 Jack No Description J203 used for communications with the printer unit (connection with the scanner motor). used for communications with the ADF (image signal input). J204 used for connection with the CCD unit. J205 used for communication with the CCD unit. J206 used for connection with the inverter PCB.
Page 284 Chapter 5 Start key STBY SREADY SCFW SCRW STBY Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Reverse Reader motor Original scanning lamp HP sensor Scanner unit position Image end HP (shading position) Copyboard HP (shading position) cover start Shift to copyboard position CCD-KILL control*1 scan start position...
Page 285: Various Control Mechanisms
Chapter 5 Image leading Stream reading position Shading Original size edge position detection position 1. HP positioning 2. move to shift shading start position 3. shift shading 4. fixed shading - white plate dust detection - shading correction 5. move to stream reading position 6.
Page 286: Enlargement/Reduction
Chapter 5 The motor driver on the interface PCB controls the rotation (activation/deactivation) of the scanner motor and its direction and speed of rotation according to the signals from the CPU. Reader controller Interface PCB Scanner +24V/15V J202 J308 motor J306 J203 J307...
Page 287: Scanning Lamp
Chapter 5 PCB generates high-frequency high voltage using the activation control circuit from the drive voltage (+24V) supplied by the reader controller PCB, thus turning on the scanning lamp. 2. Detection Error Activation The machine detects a fault in the intensity of the lamp as an activation error caused by a fault in the intensity of the lamp at time of initial activation (shading correction).
Page 288 Chapter 5 AB-Configuration Inch-configuration Original Original sensor 1 Point of original sensor 3 detection 1 STMTR Point of original detection 1 Point of original Print of original detection 2 detection 2 LTRR STMT Point of original 279.4×431.8mm Point of original detection 3 (11"×17") detection 4...
Page 289: Overview Of Operation
Chapter 5 Document size sensor 1 Point of detection 1 Point of detection 2 Point of detection 3 Point of detection 4 CCD original detection position F-5-19 T-5-7 Point of detection yes/no Size identified Result Note: Change in the Signal (ADF open to closed) change: no other: yes 5.3.4.3 Overview of Operation...
Page 290: Dirt Sensor Control
Chapter 5 3-2) The machine executes an external light search: for main scanning direction, it turns on the xenon lamp to check its light (reflected) at 4 points using the CCD; for the sub scanning direction, the machine checks the state of the original sensor. (external light) F-5-22...
Page 291: White Plate Dust Detection Control
Chapter 5 Start key SCAN SCAN Dust Detection Dust Detection Dust Detection Control* Control Control F-5-27 *: Only executes in the case of detecting dust at all reading points when the previous job is processed. In the case of detecting dust at all reading points, the dust correction is executed before reading to regard the less-dust position as the original reading position.
Page 292: Image Processing
Chapter 5 (a) white plate dust detection (b) white plate dust correction (2) After a Job (a) white plate dust detection (b) white plate dust correction Start key SCAN SCAN Dust detection Dust detection F-5-29 2. Particulars of Control (1) White Plate Dust Detection The machine compares the shading coefficient obtained from shift shading and the shading coefficient obtained from fixed shading to identify the presence/ absence of dust and, if any, coordinates and width of the area.
Page 293: Ccd Drive
Chapter 5 Analog image processing block Digital image processing block Reader controller Analog image Controller conversion processing Shading processing block CCD/AP PCB F-5-31 The following shows the functions of the PCBs associated with the image processing system: CCD/AP PCB: CCD drive, analog image processing, A/D conversion reader controller PCB: shading correction The machine performs image processing for every RGB line using the reader controller PCB, and the major functions involved are as follows: (1) Analog Image processing...
Page 294: Ccd Gain Correction, Offset Correction
Chapter 5 5.3.6.3 CCD Gain Correction, Offset Correction 0012-9686 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The analog video signal from the CCD is processed so that the rate of amplification is even (gain correction); the output in the absence of incident light is also processed for a specific level (offset correction).
Page 295: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 5 5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure 5.4.1 DADF 5.4.1.1 Removing the DADF (imagePRESS C1 Series/ imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0016-9703 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Fit the cable [1] of the DADF to the host machine. F-5-38 When detaching the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the glass surface and the white plate on its back.
Page 296: Scanner Parts Replacement Procedure (Imagepress C1 Series/Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 F-5-42 3) Close the toner replacement cover. 4) Detach the reader front cover [1]. F-5-40 - 2 screws [2] - 2 magnet catches [3] 5.4.3.2 Scanner Parts Replacement Procedure (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0014-1999 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ Parts: CCD unit / copyboard glass / scanning lamp / standard white plate / inverter Procedure...
Page 297 Chapter 5 F-5-45 7) Remove the magnet support plate [1]. - 2 screws [2] F-5-48 10) Detach the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2] (3 on the right side of the reader unit) F-5-46 8) Detach the reader right upper cover [1]. - 2 cover rubbers [2] F-5-49 - 2 screws [3]...
Page 298: Removing The Scanner Lamp (Imagepress C1 Series)
Chapter 5 guide. F-5-52 F-5-56 13) Hold at the bottom side of the mirror 1 mount [1] and slide toward right 3) Close the toner replacement cover. position shown in the figure. 4) Detach the reader front cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] - 2 magnet catches [3] F-5-53 14) Remove the scanning lamp [1].
Page 299 Chapter 5 F-5-59 7) Remove the magnet support plate [1]. - 2 screws [2] F-5-62 10) Detach the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2] (3 on the right side of the reader unit) F-5-60 8) Detach the reader right upper cover [1]. - 2 cover rubbers [2] F-5-63 - 2 screws [3]...
Page 300: Removing The Scanner Lamp (Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 guide. F-5-66 F-5-70 13) Hold at the bottom side of the mirror 1 mount [1] and slide toward right 3) Detach the sub station upper right cover [1]. position shown in the figure. - 3 screws [2] F-5-67 14) Remove the scanning lamp [1].
Page 301 Chapter 5 6) Detach the upper rear face cover 3 [1]. <In case of ADF> - 2 screws [2] F-5-77 9) Detach the reader rear cover [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 5 screws [3] F-5-74 <In case of Copyboard Cover> - 1 screws [1] F-5-78 10) Detach the reader upper rear cover [1].
Page 302 Chapter 5 F-5-84 (Subsequent steps are applied only for the ADF) 16) Detach the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2] (3 screws at the right side of the reader) F-5-81 <In case of Copyboard Cover> 13) Detach the upper right cover [1] for the copyboard cover. - 2 screws [2] - 2 cover rubbers [3] F-5-85...
Page 303: Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 5 5.4.5 Reader Controller PCB 5.4.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Reader Controller PCB (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0013-9947 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Remove the copyboard glass. (page 5-16)Reference [Removing the Copyboard Glass] 5.4.5.2 Removing the Reader Controller PCB (imagePRESS C1 Series) 0013-9948...
Page 304: Removing The Reader Controller Pcb (Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 3) Detach the sub station upper right cover [1]. - 3 screws [2] F-5-94 F-5-98 How to remove the flat cable [2] 4) Detach the reader front cover [1]. Release the lock lever [1] in the direction shown by the arrow, and then re- - 2 screws [2] move the flat cable [2].
Page 305 Chapter 5 F-5-104 (Subsequent steps are applied only for the ADF) 10) Detach the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2] (3 screws at the right side of the reader) F-5-101 <In case of Copyboard Cover> 7) Detach the upper right cover [1] for the copyboard cover. - 2 screws [2] - 2 cover rubbers [3] F-5-105...
Page 306: Procedure After Replacement Of The Reader Controller Pcb (Imagepress C1 Series/Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 5.4.5.4 Procedure after Replacement of the Reader Controller PCB (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0014-2021 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ Before Replacement (Data Backup) If possible, go through the following procedure: - Download the data registered in the reader controller RAM by SST. - Print out the data in the User Mode / Service Mode.
Page 307: Inverter Pcb
Chapter 5 F-5-112 6) Remove the interface PCB [1]. - 7 screws [2] - 2 screws [3] F-5-115 3) Remove the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2] (3 on the right side of the reader assembly) F-5-113 5.4.7 Inverter PCB 5.4.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Inverter PCB (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0013-9954...
Page 308: Removing The Inverter Pcb (Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 - 1 screw [4] - 2 PCB support [5] F-5-122 4) Detach the reader front cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] F-5-119 - 2 magnet catches [3] 5.4.7.3 Removing the Inverter PCB (imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0016-9497 Color Image Reader-H1 1) Open the sub station front right cover [1] and the sub station front left cov- er [2].
Page 309 Chapter 5 F-5-128 (The subsequent steps are applied only for ADF.) 10) Detach the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2] (3 screws at the right side of the reader) F-5-125 <In case of copyboard cover> 7) Detach the upper right cover [1] for the copyboard cover. - 2 screws [2] - 2 cover rubbers [3] F-5-129...
Page 310: Ccd Unit
Chapter 5 - 1 connector [3] - 1 screw [4] - 2 PCB supports [5] F-5-134 F-5-131 5.4.8 CCD Unit 5.4.8.1 Preparation for Removing the CCD Unit (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0013-9941 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Remove the copyboard glass.
Page 311: Removing The Ccd Unit (Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 F-5-141 3) Detach the sub station upper right cover [1]. F-5-138 - 3 screws [2] 6) Remove the CCD unit [1]. - 2 flat cables [2] - 2 screws [3] - 2 leaf springs [4] F-5-142 4) Detach the reader front cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] - 2 magnet catches [3] F-5-139...
Page 312 Chapter 5 F-5-148 (The subsequent steps are applied only for ADF.) 10) Detach the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2] (3 screws at the right side of the reader) F-5-145 <In case of Copyboard Cover> 7) Detach the upper right cover [1] for the copyboard cover. - 2 screws [2] - 2 cover rubbers [3] F-5-149...
Page 313: Scanner Parts Replacement Procedure (Imagepress C1 Series/Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 5.4.8.4 Scanner Parts Replacement Procedure (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0014-2024 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ Parts: CCD unit / copyboard glass / scanning lamp / inverter PCB Procedure Execute the following Service Modes in order. 1) COPIER >...
Page 314: Removing The Scanner Motor (Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 driver etc.,) 9) Slide the scanner motor [5] in the direction shown by the arrow, and then remove the belt [3] from the gear [4]. F-5-157 F-5-160 2) Detach the upper rear face cover 3 [1]. <In case of ADF> - 2 screws [1] F-5-158 Points to Note When Attaching the Belt...
Page 315: Attaching The Scanner Motor (Imagepress C1 Series/Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 (in the case of imagePRESS C1 Series). 5.4.9.4 Attaching the Scanner Motor (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0014-2025 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ When attaching the scanner motor, be sure to check that the timing belt [3] has been surely set to the scanner pulley [1] and the motor shaft [2].
Page 316: Removing The Adf Open/Close Sensor(Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 F-5-170 4) Remove the ADF open/close sensor [1]. - 1 connector [2] F-5-173 <In case of copyboard cover> - 1 screw [1] F-5-171 5.4.10.2 Removing the ADF Open/Close Sensor(imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0016-9500 Color Image Reader-H1 1) In the case of the copyboard cover, detach the upper rear face plate 1 [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-5-174 3) Detach the top rear cover [1] of the sub station and remove the filter [2].
Page 317: Scanner Home Position Sensor
Chapter 5 F-5-176 5) Detach the reader rear cover [1]. F-5-179 - 1 connector [2] 2) Detach the reader rear upper cover [1]. - 5 screws [3] - 1 screw [2] - 1 embossed section [3] F-5-177 6) Detach the reader upper rear cover [1]. F-5-180 - 1 screw [2] 3) Remove the reader I/F cable [2] from the 2 wire saddles [1].
Page 318: Removing The Scanner Home Position Sensor (Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 - 2 screws [1] F-5-183 6) Remove the sensor mount [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-5-187 <In case of copyboard cover> - 1 screw [1] F-5-184 7) Remove the scanner home position sensor [1]. - 1 connector [2] F-5-188 3) Detach the top rear cover [1] of the sub station and remove the filter [2].
Page 319: Original Sensor
Chapter 5 F-5-190 5) Detach the reader rear cover [1]. F-5-193 - 1 connector [2] 2) Detach the reader right cover [1]. - 5 screws [3] - 3 cover rubbers [2] - 3 screws [3] F-5-191 6) Detach the reader upper rear cover [1]. - 1 screw [2] - 1 emboss [3] F-5-194...
Page 320: Removing The Original Size Sensor (Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 slots [2] and then fix it with screws. er [2]. F-5-197 4) Slightly lift up the document size sensor unit [1]. - 3 screws [2] F-5-201 2) Detach the sub station upper front cover [1]. - 3 screws [2] F-5-198 5) Remove the document size sensor unit [1].
Page 321: Scanner Drive Cable
Chapter 5 7) For the subsequent steps, see step 4 to 6 in 'Removing the Original Size Sensor' (in the case of imagePRESS C1 Series). 5.4.13 Scanner Drive Cable 5.4.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Scanner Motor Drive Wire (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0013-9970 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+...
Page 322 Chapter 5 F-5-212 7) Detach the reader right cover [1]. F-5-215 - 3 cover rubber (large) [2] - 3 screws [3] 10) Remove the control panel interface cable [2] from the control panel arm unit [1]. - 2 edge saddles [3] F-5-216 11) Remove the control panel arm unit [1].
Page 323 Chapter 5 F-5-221 15) Remove the control panel interface cable [2] from the 2 wire saddles [1] and then disconnect the connector [3]. F-5-222 16) Detach the reader rear cover [1]. F-5-218 - 5 screws [2] 12) Detach the reader upper right cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] F-5-223 17) Detach the reader rear upper cover [1].
Page 324 Chapter 5 F-5-228 22) Remove the cable [3] from the 2 wire saddles [1] and then remove the reuse band [3]. 23) Disconnect the connector [4] and then remove the cable [6] from the edge saddle [5]. F-5-225 19) Detach the reader left cover [1]. - 4 screws [2] F-5-229 24) Remove the DF right hinge mount [1].
Page 325: Removing The Scanner Drive Wire (Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 29) Remove the reader upper frame [1]. - 7 screws [2] - 18 screws [3] F-5-231 26) Detach the DF mount reinforcement plate [1] - 3 screws [2] F-5-235 30) Remove the 2 wire fixing screws [2] on the primary mirror mount [1]. 31) Remove the spring [3] to fix the wire.
Page 326 Chapter 5 F-5-240 5) Detach the reader front cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] - 2 magnet catches [3] F-5-237 2) Open the sub station front right cover [1] and the sub station front left cov- er [2]. F-5-241 6) Detach the upper rear face cover 1 [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-5-238 3) Detach the sub station upper front cover [1].
Page 327 Chapter 5 F-5-246 10) Detach the reader rear cover [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 5 screws [3] F-5-243 <In case of copyboard cover> - 1 screw [1] F-5-247 11) Detach the reader upper rear cover [1]. - 1 screw [2] - 1 emboss [3] F-5-244 8) Detach the sub station upper rear cover [1] and the filter [2].
Page 328 Chapter 5 F-5-253 17) Attach the reader right rear cover [1]. - 2 screws (TP; M4X6)[[2] F-5-250 <In case of copyboard cover> 14) Detach the upper right cover [1] for the copyboard cover. - 2 screws [2] - 2 cover rubbers [3] F-5-254 18) Detach the sub station upper left cover [1] - 9 screws [2]...
Page 329: Attaching The Scanner Drive Wire (Imagepress C1 Series/Imagepress C7000 Series)
Chapter 5 F-5-256 20) For the subsequent steps, see step 20 to 33 in 'Removing the Scanner Drive Wire' (in case of imagePRESS C1 Series). 5.4.13.4 Attaching the Scanner Drive Wire (imagePRESS C1 Series/imagePRESS C7000 Series) 0014-1578 imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Put the ball of the wire into the hole on the drive pulley[1] and wind the wire around it (inner side 4 turns, outer side 5 turns), then fix it with the tape etc.
Page 330: Points To Note When Attaching The Control Panel (Imagepress C1 Series)
Chapter 5 F-5-260 3) Insert the pin of the mirror positioning tool (front [2], rear [3]) into each hole [1] of the primary mirror base and the secondary mirror base. F-5-262 4) Fix the ends of the wire (temporarily fixed to the reader frame) with the spring.
Page 331 Chapter 5 Points to Note When Attaching the Arm Unit - Turn the arm unit in the direction shown by the arrow until the screw hole [1] matches that of the control panel arm unit. F-5-267 F-5-264 - Be sure to fit the screws in order. Adjust the position of the arm unit [1] by the 1 screw [2], and then secure it in place by the 4 screws [3].
Page 332 Chapter 6 Laser Exposure...
Page 334 Contents Contents 6.1 Construction ...................................6-1 6.1.1 Specifications/Control Mechanisms/Functions ........................... 6-1 6.1.2 Major Components..................................6-1 6.1.3 Control System Configuration ..............................6-2 6.2 Basic Sequence ................................6-2 6.2.1 Basic Sequence .................................... 6-2 6.3 Various Control................................6-3 6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing............................. 6-3 6.3.1.1 ON/OFF Control ......................................6-3 6.3.1.2 Main Scan Sync Control ....................................6-4 6.3.1.3 Sub Scan Sync Control....................................6-5 6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ............................
Page 335: Construction
Chapter 6 6.1 Construction 6.1.1 Specifications/Control Mechanisms/Functions 0012-5445 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Laser Beam Wavelength 645 to 665 nm (Visible laser) Output 20mW Number of laser beams 2-beam laser Laser scanner motor...
Page 336: Control System Configuration
6.1.3 Control System Configuration 0012-5542 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Control of the laser exposure system is mainly performed at ASIC1 (IC53) in DC controller PCB. ASIC1 (IC53) performs the following six controls and produces the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum based on the video signals sent from the main controller PCB.
Page 337: Various Control
6.3.1.1 ON/OFF Control 0012-6373 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The laser beam ON/OFF is performed at the laser driver PCB. This circuit controls the laser beam ON/OFF according to the combination of the laser control signal sent from DC controller PCB.
Page 338: Main Scan Sync Control
6.3.1.2 Main Scan Sync Control 0012-6512 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Sync control of main scanning is the control for adjustment of the writing position in the main scanning. This control is performed at BD sync control circuit in PWM IC.
Page 339: Sub Scan Sync Control
0012-7579 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The sync control of the sub scanning is the control for adjustment of the writing position of each color image formed on ITB at full-color print.
Page 340: Controlling The Intensity Of Laser Light
6.3.2.1 APC Control 0012-7586 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ In the APC control, the laser is controlled to keep the constant light intensity by adjusting the laser diode output on the laser driver.
Page 341: Controlling The Laser Shutter
6.3.4.1 Laser Shutter Control 0012-6195 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine has the protection function that prevents exposing the laser to inside of the machine when opening the toner hopper assembly.
Page 342 Chapter 6 F-6-10 [1] Laser Light [2] Laser Shutter [3] Laser Shutter Lever...
Page 343: Parts Replacement Procedure
6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure 6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit 6.4.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Laser Scanner Unit 0013-9987 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the decurler. 2) Detach the left upper cover.
Page 344 Chapter 7 Image Formation...
Page 346 Contents Contents 7.1 Construction ...................................7-1 7.1.1 Image Formation Specification List ............................7-1 7.1.2 Main Components ..................................7-2 7.1.3 Main Components ..................................7-2 7.1.4 Charge Specification ................................... 7-3 7.1.5 Charge Specification ..................................7-4 7.2 Image Formation Process...............................7-5 7.2.1 Image Formation Process ................................7-5 7.3 Basic Sequence ................................7-8 7.3.1 When Turning the Power ON ..............................
Page 347 Contents 7.8 Toner Container................................7-52 7.8.1 Outline......................................7-52 7.8.2 Outline......................................7-53 7.8.3 Toner Bottle Presence Detection ............................... 7-54 7.8.4 Toner Bottle Presence Detection ............................... 7-55 7.8.5 Toner Supply....................................7-55 7.8.6 Toner Supply....................................7-57 7.8.7 Toner Level Detection ................................7-58 7.8.8 Toner Level Detection ................................7-59 7.9 Transfer Device ................................
Page 348 Contents 7.14.8.2 Removing the pre-transfer corona assembly...............................7-88 7.14.8.3 After Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly ..........................7-88 7.14.9 Pre-Transfer Corona Pad Holder ............................. 7-88 7.14.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Pre-transfer Corona Assembly Pad Holder ....................7-88 7.14.9.2 Removing the Pre-transfer corona assembly pad folder ..........................7-89 7.14.10 Pre-Transfer Corona Slider ..............................
Page 349 Contents 7.14.27 Intermediate Transfer Belt ..............................7-102 7.14.27.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB ................................. 7-102 7.14.27.2 Removing the ITB ....................................7-102 7.14.28 Primary Transfer Roller ............................... 7-103 7.14.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Transfer Roller ......................... 7-103 7.14.28.2 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller ..............................7-103 7.14.29 Secondary Transfer External Roller.............................
Page 350: Construction
Chapter 7 7.1 Construction 7.1.1 Image Formation Specification List 0012-4793 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-7-1 Drum Unit Specification Photosensitive Drum Drum type OPC drum Drum diameter 84 dia Cleaning mechanism Blade / brush roller...
Page 351: Main Components
Printer PASCAL control Determines the appropriate gradation table. (Printer) 7.1.2 Main Components 0012-4852 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 The main units used in the developing system of the machine are shown in the following figure. [15] [16] [17] [18]...
Page 352: Charge Specification
[17] Thermal Sensor [18] Potential Sensor [19] Developing Assembly (L) 7.1.4 Charge Specification 0012-4899 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 - Primary Charging Bias Charging method: Corona charging Charging object: Primary charging wire DC bias value: 9k V (-1000u A)
Page 353: Charge Specification
Chapter 7 Charging object: Secondary transfer static charge eliminator DC bias value: -4.0k V - Secondary Transfer Bias Charging method: Roller charging Charging object: Secondary transfer roller DC bias value: -7.0k V (-375u A) - ITB Cleaning Roller 1 Charging method: Roller charging Charging object: Bias roller / brush roller DC bias value: -3k V - ITB Cleaning Roller 2...
Page 354: Image Formation Process
7.2 Image Formation Process 7.2.1 Image Formation Process 0012-4907 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Electrostatic Latent Image Formation Block This block consists of 3 steps, and forming the electrostatic latent image onto the photosensitive drum.
Page 355 Chapter 7 becomes the electrostatic latent image. 2. Developing Block - Step 4: Development [4] By putting toner to the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photosensitive drum, turning the image visible. Black toner/color toner of this machine executes the toner projection development with non-magnetic 2 components development.
Page 356 Chapter 7 F-7-6 [1] ITB [2] Secondary Transfer Outside Roller [3] Brush Roller [4] Bias Roller [5] Cleaning Blade [6] Waste Toner Case [7] Waste Toner 7. Photosensitive Drum Cleaning Block - Step 12: Pre-cleaning Exposure [12] Because of the difference in the level of toner layers that are formed on the ITB, the potential difference occurs. With the occurrence of the discharging phenomenon, it becomes the drum memory.
Page 357: Basic Sequence
7.3.1 When Turning the Power ON 0012-6528 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 In case of turning on the main power switch when the temperature of the fixing roller surface is under 50 deg C. (when turning on the main power switch after leaving it for a long time, e.g., in the morning)
Page 358: When Turning The Power On
ITB cleaner rotation Upstream ITB cleaner high pressure Downstream ITB cleaner bias high pressure F-7-10 7.3.3 Copy / Print (Normal Speed) 0012-6533 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 In case of full color, plain paper, an A4 sheet. 1. Feature...
Page 359: Copy / Print (Normal Speed)
Chapter 7 - While forming the image on the ITB, the ITB cleaning brush roller and the secondary transfer outside roller are separated from the ITB. Image forming possible timing Start key ON Printer unit PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR Laser scanner motor ITB HP signal PVREQ signal Laser...
Page 360 Chapter 7 Image forming possible timing Start key ON Printer unit PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR Laser scanner motor ITB HP signal PVREQ signal Laser Drum/ITB motor Pre-conditioning LED Primary charging bias Grid bias Developing rotary motor Developing bias (DC) Developing bias (AC) Developing clutch Post charging bias Primary transfer bias...
Page 361: Copy / Print (1/3 Speed)
7.3.5 Copy / Print (1/3 Speed) 0012-6534 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. Feature In both monochrome and full color, the 1/3 speed is used with the heavy paper (105 to 256g), the single-sided coated paper (106 to 256g), double-sided coated paper (106 to 256g), and OHT.
Page 362: Overview Of Image Stabilization Control
Chapter 7 T-7-4 Control Item Description [1]D-max control Determines the appropriate developing bias value. [2]ATR control Determines the toner supply. [3]ATVC control Determines the appropriate transfer bias value. [4]Potential control Determines the appropriate primary grid bias value. [5]ACVC control Determines the appropriate cleaning bias value. [6]ARCDAT control Determines the appropriate gradation table.
Page 363 Chapter 7 DC-CON LUT(Printer) LUT(Printer+Reader) MN-CON PRINTER READER F-7-15 T-7-5 Control Item Description [1] D-max control Determines the appropriate developing bias value. [2] ATR control Determines the toner supply. [3] ATVC control Determines the appropriate transfer bias value. [4] Potential control Determines the appropriate primary grid bias value.
Page 364: Image Stabilization Control Timing
0014-5436 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The items to be implemented in this control differ by the condition (environment or the duration status of the image formation system parts) of the product.
Page 365: Potential Control
7.4.5 Potential Control 0012-7463 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ In order to realize stable printing, the machine executes the potential control against the electrostatic latent image factors, i.e. deterioration of the photosensitive drum sensitivity and the environmental changes.
Page 366: Atvc Control
0013-3674 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ When transferring toner from the photosensitive drum to the ITB, from the ITB to a paper, the ATVC control is executed to determine the appropriate transfer voltage.
Page 367 Chapter 7 UN-5 ENV_TEMP DC-CON J1407 J1188 J1189 J202 J201 J556 HV2-SUB HUM1 J205 J203 J3150 J3050 HVT2 HVT4 F-7-19 [1] Primary Transfer Roller [2] Secondary Transfer Inside Roller [3] Secondary Transfer Outside Roller DC-CON: DC Controller HUM1: Environment Sensor UN5: Pickup Driver PCB 1.
Page 368 Chapter 7 Create It - Vt Curve By adding the predefined voltage (+/-100V: vary depending on the environment) to the voltage value obtained from the constant current and measuring each current value, create the It-Vt Cruve. Environment Sensor Monitor The DC controller calculates the correction value from the environment sensor information. Determine the primary transfer bias The DC controller determines the appropriate primary transfer bias in consideration of the correction value.
Page 369: Atr Control
Chapter 7 7.4.7 ATR Control 0013-3721 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 The ATR control is executed to supply the toner to the developing assembly by calculating the supply amount from the toner consumption. 1. Description a. Toner Supply Calculation The amount of toner supplied to each developing assembly is determined.
Page 370: Atr Control
Chapter 7 E020-xx83 Dark current measurement is 90 or greater in patch detection E020-xx84 Difference between the background measurement and the dark current measurement is 30 or less in patch detection E020-xx85 Difference between the patch measurement and the dark current measurement is 30 or less in patch detection E020-xx86 Difference between the patch measurement and the background measurement is 30 or less in patch detection E020-xx87 Dark current measurement is 930 or greater in patch detection E020-xx88 Dark current measurement detected by the front sensor is 30 or less in patch detection...
Page 371 Chapter 7 MN-CON DC-CON F-7-22 [1] Video count [2] Data from the patch image scan sensor [3] Data from the ATR sensor [4] Development rotary assembly PS7: ATR sensor PS3: patch image scan sensor DC-CON: DC controller MN-CON: main controller Related Error Codes: E020-xx10 Standard deviation of Sig (initial data) is less than 62 in default patch detection E020-xx11 Standard deviation of Sig (initial data) is 960 or greater in default patch detection...
Page 372: Acvc Control
7.4.9 ACVC Control 0013-4417 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This equipment performs ACVC control which determines the most suitable cleaning bias in order to clear the residual toner from the surface of ITB.
Page 373: D-Max Control
7.4.10 D-max Control 0014-4592 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 This D-max control (image density correction control) is executed to control the variation in image density caused by the change in environment, or deterioration of the photosensitive drum or toner.
Page 374: D-Max Control
Chapter 7 MN-CON DC-CON F-7-25 [1] Detection result of the patch image read sensor [2] Detection result of the ATR sensor PS7: ATR sensor PS3: Patch image read sensor DC-CON: DC controller MN-CON: Main controller 7.4.11 D-max Control 0020-4149 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This D-max control (image density correction control) is executed to control the variation in image density caused by the change in environment, or deterioration of the photosensitive drum or toner.
Page 375: D-Half Control
MN-CON: Main controller 7.4.12 D-half Control 0013-4454 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 This control regulates gradation correction in the main controller of the printer in order to achieve optimum gradation characteristics. Start-Up Timing - While performing the PASCAL control - During last rotation after 500 printing jobs (When the full-color prints) - During initial multiple rotation at power-on (The fixing temperature must be 50 deg C or lower.)
Page 376 Chapter 7 Laser Scanner unit PS76 DC-CON MN-CON F-7-27 [1] Patch image data [2] Density data [3] D-half control [4] Video data PS3, PS4, PS76: patch image sensor Operation Flow Chart Below is operation flow chart of D-half control. Start-Up Main Controller Patch Pattern Data Output DC Controller...
Page 377: D-Half Control
Chapter 7 Front Center Rear PDL Character PDL Image Copy Image (10 patches) (10 patches) (10 patches) For each color Copy Character (10 patches) ARCDAT Standard Pattern PLD Character(1 patches) PLD Image (1 patches) For each color Copy Image (1 patches) F-7-29 ARCDAT Correction Calculation Flow Chart Start-Up...
Page 378 Chapter 7 (See Note.) Laser Scanner unit PS76 DC-CON MN-CON F-7-31 [1] Patch image data [2] Density data [3] D-half control [4] Video data PS3, PS4, PS76: patch image sensor Operation Flow Chart Below is operation flow chart of D-half control. Start-Up Main Controller Patch Pattern Data Output...
Page 379: Arcdat Control
Data Output (DC-CON) Standard Data F-7-34 7.4.14 ARCDAT Control 0013-4818 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 ARCDAT control regulates the gradation correction in the main controller in order to achieve desired gradation characteristics. Start-up Conditions - Performed sheet-to-sheet Description Main controller outputs the patch data of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) at the DC controller sheet-to-sheet. DC controller produces patch patterns of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) on the drum based on this data.
Page 380 Chapter 7 Laser Scanner unit PS76 DC-CON MN-CON F-7-35 [1] Patch image data [2] Density data [3] ARCDAT control [4] Video data PS4: patch image sensor (for Y and Bk) PS76: patch image sensor (for M and C) Operation Flow Chart Below is operation flow chart of ARCDAT control.
Page 381: Arcdat Control
Chapter 7 C and Bk, measurements are performed while printing the second document, and the results will be reflected in the third printed document. In the case of 2-image print, patch pattern measurement results of Y and M will be reflected not in the second but the third printed document as data processing takes more time. A4 Full Color On the drum 1st page...
Page 382 Chapter 7 Laser Scanner unit PS76 DC-CON MN-CON F-7-38 [1] Patch image data [2] Density data [3] ARCDAT control [4] Video data PS4: patch image sensor (for Y and Bk) PS76: patch image sensor (for M and C) Operation Flow Chart Below is operation flow chart of ARCDAT control.
Page 383: Pascal Control
7.4.16 PASCAL Control 0013-5521 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine provides two types of PASCAL control (image characteristics correction control); Reader PASCAL and Printer PASCAL. - Reader PASCAL (3-page output paper): Reads the 3-page output images at the reader unit and expresses them in ideal image characteristics by the PASCAL control (image characteristics correction con- trol).
Page 384 Chapter 7 Reader Read the data of test patterns. MN-CON DC-CON Output the test patterns. Printer F-7-41 MN-CON: Main controller DC-CON: DC controller 1. Operation Flow Activation Printer Output the test pattern from the main controller. (3 types) Set the output test print in the reader unit. Reader unit Read the test print.
Page 385 Chapter 7 This machine performs PASCAL control (image characteristics correction control) on the printer side only to realize ideal image characteristics by using the two color sensors mounted in the duplexing feeding unit, without using the reader unit. This control is performed in the main controller on the printer side. The printer outputs the test patterns based on the data in the main controller.
Page 386: Acr Control (Auto Carrier Refresh Control)
7.4.17 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh Control) 0014-5067 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 This machine performs ACR control, which works for supplying developer and also discharging deteriorated carrier, to increase the life of each developing unit. The supplied developer is transported by the developer stirring screw in the developing unit.
Page 387: Acr Control (Auto Carrier Refresh Control)
Chapter 7 DC-CON F-7-45 F-7-46 [1] developing cylinder [2] developer stirring screw A [3] developer stirring screw B [4] toner supply mouth [5] toner discharge mouth [6] waste toner feeding screw M3: developing motor M4: developing rotary motor CL1: developing clutch 7.4.18 ACR Control (Auto Carrier Refresh Control) 0020-4157 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+...
Page 388: Charging Meachanism
7.5.1 Primary Charging Bias Control 0012-8166 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The primary charging bias is created to charge the photosensitive drum surface with even minus electric potential as a preparation for image formation.
Page 389: Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Control
7.5.2 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Control 0012-8167 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine cleans the charging wire to prevent dirt on the charging wire in the primary charging assembly. In this function, the primary charging wire cleaning motor (M19) rotates forward and reverse, and it rotates the cleaner screw.
Page 390: Pre-Transfer Charging Bias Control
0012-8168 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The pre-transfer charging bias is applied to the toner on the photosensitive drum when development is performed in order to align the electric potential for the toner layer formed on the ITB.
Page 391: Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Control
7.5.4 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Control 0012-8169 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine cleans the charging wire to prevent dirt on the charging wire in the pre-transfer charging assembly. In this function, the pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor (M20) rotates forward and reverse, and it rotates the cleaner screw.
Page 392: Pre-Exposure Led
7.5.5 Pre-Exposure LED 0012-8172 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine uses the pre-exposure LED to prevent uneven density in the print image by removing the remanent charge on the photosensitive drum.
Page 393: Overview Of Developing Rotary
Chapter 7 DC-CON PS21 F-7-53 DC-CON: DC controller M4: developing rotary motor PS21: developing rotary home position sensor 7.6.2 Overview of Developing Rotary 0020-4161 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The developing rotary has a function to move the developing unit to the specified position. 5 types of developing units (L, Y, M, C, Bk) are stored inside the rotary.
Page 394: Developing Rotary Control
7.6.3 Developing Rotary Control 0013-9863 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 This machine moves the developing units (Y, M, C, Bk), which are stored in the developing rotary, timely to the specified position. The DC controller moves the developing rotary by turning ON and OFF the developing rotary motor (M4) while monitoring the rotary position with the developing rotary home position sensor (PS21).
Page 395 Chapter 7 Home position Developing standby position (full color) Developing standby position (monochrome) F-7-56 The followings show the timing of the developing rotary at printing. - Timing chart of the developing rotary (at full-color print) Timing that image Turning ON the start key formation is available printer unit PSTBY...
Page 396: Developing Rotary Control
Chapter 7 7.6.4 Developing Rotary Control 0020-4164 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine moves the developing units (L, Y, M, C, Bk), which are stored in the developing rotary, timely to the specified position. The DC controller moves the developing rotary by turning ON and OFF the developing rotary motor (M4) while monitoring the rotary position with the developing rotary home position sensor (PS21).
Page 397 Chapter 7 Home position Developing standby position (5-color full color / L mono color) Developing standby position (Bk mono color) Developing standby position (4-color full color) F-7-60 The followings show the timing of the developing rotary at printing. - Timing chart of the developing rotary (at full-color print) Timing that image Turning ON the start key formation is available...
Page 398: Developing Unit
7.7.1 Developing Unit Configuration 0012-7123 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 This machine has four developing assemblies (Y, M, C, Bk), which are stored in the developing rotary. Each developing assembly has the same configuration. The toner bottles supply toner with different components (pigments).
Page 399: Developing Bias Control
7.7.4 Developing Bias Control 0012-7127 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 The developing bias is created to apply toner on the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photosensitive drum. The developing bias provides two types of biases (developing DC bias and developing AC bias).
Page 400: Developing Bias Control
Chapter 7 DC-CON J1187 J3201 HVT5 J3211 AC+DC F-7-66 [1] Developing cylinder DC-CON: DC controller HVT: High voltage PCB 7.7.5 Developing Bias Control 0020-4169 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The developing bias is created to apply toner on the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photosensitive drum. The developing bias provides two types of biases (developing DC bias and developing AC bias).
Page 401: Toner Container
7.8.1 Outline 0012-9293 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 The machine has four toner bottles (Y, M, C, Bk). Each toner bottle consists of toner and a stirring plate. The hopper unit consists of the toner supply screw, toner feeder screw, and toner level sensor.
Page 402: Outline
Chapter 7 MN-CON DC-CON PS74 M27 30 SW7 SW10 TS1 TS4 M39 42 PS68 PS71 F-7-68 [1] Toner bottle [2] Stirring plate [3] Hopper unit [4] Toner supply screw [5] Toner feeder screw [6] Toner feeder screw [7] Developing assembly [8] Toner replacement cover [9] Side driver PCB M3: Developing motor...
Page 403: Toner Bottle Presence Detection
7.8.3 Toner Bottle Presence Detection 0012-9295 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 This machine detects the presence of the toner bottle when the side driver PCB detects the toner bottle presence detection switch (SW7 to SW10). The machine rotates the knob of the toner bottle, of which protrusion presses the micro switch (SW7 to SW10), and detects the presence of the toner bottle.
Page 404: Toner Bottle Presence Detection
7.8.5 Toner Supply 0012-9296 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 Toner of each color is sent from the toner bottle to the hopper unit, and sent to the developing assembly on a timely basis. There are two supply routes; "hopper supply" between the toner bottle and hopper unit, and "developing assembly toner supply" between the hopper unit and de- veloping assembly.
Page 405 Chapter 7 MN-CON DC-CON [15] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] M27 30 M39 42 PS68 PS71 F-7-72 [1] Toner retainer [2] Stirring plate [3] Hopper unit [4] Toner feed screw [5] Toner supply screw [6] Toner supply screw [7] Developing assembly [8] Sensor flag [9] Toner retainer motor drive signal [10] Toner retainer motor error detection signal...
Page 406: Toner Supply
Chapter 7 Related Error Code E025-0103: Y toner retainer motor connection detection error E025-0203: M toner retainer motor connection detection error E025-0303: C toner retainer motor connection detection error E025-0403: Bk toner retainer motor connection detection error In the case of detecting that the connector of the toner retainer motor is disconnected. Related Error Code E025-0004: Hopper Shutter Error In the case of supplying toner while the hopper shutter is closed...
Page 407: Toner Level Detection
When the motor is detected as out of locking state for 1 sec or more after its stable rotation. 7.8.7 Toner Level Detection 0012-9297 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 This machine employs two different methods shown below to detect toner level of each color in the hopper assembly. 1. Video count detection 2.
Page 408: Toner Level Detection
Chapter 7 MN-CON DC-CON TS1 TS4 F-7-74 [1] Toner cartridge [2] Toner sensor signal [3] Hopper assembly [4] Developing assembly [5] Side driver PCB TS1 to TS4: toner sensor (piezo sensor) Video count detection The mechanism of the video count detection is that toner level in the hopper assembly is determined by calculating the amount of toner consumption for each color based on video data received from the main controller.
Page 409: Transfer Device
Service Mode: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > T-LW-LVL 7.9 Transfer Device 7.9.1 Overview of Transfer Assembly 0013-5961 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The transfer assembly is composed of the primary transfer assembly and the secondary transfer assembly. 7-60...
Page 410: Transfer Bias Control
7.9.2 Transfer Bias Control 0013-7364 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ There are primary transfer bias used at the primary transfer assembly and secondary transfer bias used at the secondary transfer assembly. There are three kinds of bias (DC bias for primary transfer, DC reverse bias for primary transfer, tension roller bias) for the primary transfer bias.
Page 411 Chapter 7 DC-CON J1188 J1184 J1187 J1189 J202 J201 HV2-SUB J205 J207 J206 J203 J204 J3150 J3050 J3400 HVT2 HVT9 HVT4 HVT5 HVT10 J3250 HVT6-2 HVT6-1 HVT3 HVT8 HVT3-SUB F-7-77 [1] Primary transfer roller [2] Potential plate [3] Secondary transfer inside roller [4] Secondary transfer outside roller HVT2: High-voltage PCB 2 HVT3: High-voltage PCB 3...
Page 412: Overview Of The Primary Transfer Assembly
7.9.3 Overview of the Primary Transfer Assembly 0013-6761 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The primary transfer assembly has three motors to activate/detach the main roller. The drum/ITB motor (M2) rotates the ITB drive roller and the ITB cleaning screw. The brush roller attachment/detachment motor (M18) performs attachment/ detachment between the brush roller for ITB cleaning and the ITB.
Page 413: Itb Cleaner Attachment/Detachment Detection
DC-CON: DC controller 7.9.5 ITB Cleaner Attachment/Detachment Detection 0013-6824 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine performs home position detection to detect the position of the brush roller for ITB cleaning. 7-64...
Page 414: Overview Of The Secondary Transfer Assembly
7.9.6 Overview of the Secondary Transfer Assembly 0013-7782 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The secondary transfer assembly has the secondary transfer outside roller attachment/detachment motor (M17) for attachment/detachment between the secondary transfer outside roller and the ITB, and the secondary transfer outside roller drive motor (M37) that activates the main roller (the secondary transfer outside roller, the brush roller, the bias roller).
Page 415: Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Attachment/Detachment Control
7.9.7 Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Attachment/Detachment Control 0013-7803 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine performs attachment/detachment between the secondary transfer outside roller and the ITB to transfer the toner on the ITB to the print paper.
Page 416: Secondary Transfer Roller Attachment/Detachment Detection
7.9.8 Secondary Transfer Roller Attachment/Detachment Detection 0013-7813 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine performs home position detection to detect the position of the secondary transfer outside roller. The DC controller monitors the output of the secondary transfer outside roller home position sensor (PS23) to perform this detection.
Page 417: Secondary Transfer Roller Cleaning Control
0013-8138 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine collects the patch pattern remained on the ITB and the residual toner on the secondary transfer outside roller into the waste toner case beneath the secondary transfer outside roller by the image stabilization control (ATR, simplified D-half control).
Page 418 Chapter 7 roller. 2. After completing primary transfer, the DC controller outputs the secondary transfer outside roller attachment/detachment motor drive signal. 3. The clockwise rotation of the attachment/detachment cam (thereby locking the secondary transfer outside roller in place against the ITB) 4.
Page 419: Itb Home Position Detection
7.9.10 ITB Home Position Detection 0013-7818 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 This machine detects the ITB home position to adjust the reading position of the image. The ITB home position sensor (PS1, PSS2) detects the home position detection surface (two reflecting surfaces) prepared at the end of the ITB to detect the home position.
Page 420: Itb Home Position Detection
Chapter 7 Start key ON INTR PRINT A-surf I_TOP1A I_TOP2A I_TOP3A I_TOP4A Home position detection signal B-surf (PS1 or PS2 output) PVREQ Laser (image formation) F-7-86 2. Full-Color 2-Sheet Continuous Printing (2-image printing) (See after-mentioned note) PVREQ signal (image demanding signal) for each color is produced based on the A-surface ITB home position detection signal (I_TOP1A) and the B-surface ITB home position detection signal (I_TOP1B).
Page 421 Chapter 7 DC-CON I_TOP_SNS_1 I_TOP_SNS_2 F-7-89 [1] ITB [2] Reflecting surface [3] Side driver PCB PS1: ITB home position sensor A PS2: ITB home position sensor B DC-CON: DC controller MEMO: A-surface home position (I_TOP1A) is the signal to form images by one surface on the ITB. B-surface home position (I_TOP1B) is the signal to form images by two surfaces on the ITB.
Page 422 Chapter 7 Start key ON INTR PRINT Home position A-sur I_TOP1A I_TOP2A I_TOP3A I_TOP4A I_TOP5A detection signal face B-sur I_TOP1B I_TOP2B I_TOP3B I_TOP4B I_TOP5B (PS1 or PS2 output) face PVREQ Laser (image formation) F-7-91 3. Full-color one-sheet print PVREQ signal (image demanding signal) for each color is produces based on A-surface ITB home position detection signal (I_TOP1A). The image is formed based on this PVREQ signal.
Page 423: Photosensitive Drum Cleaning
0013-9072 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The drum cleaning unit is placed at the side of the photosensitive drum inside the process unit. It has the function of collecting the residual toner on the photosensitive drum.
Page 424: Waste Toner Collection Mechanism
7.11.1 Collecting Waste Toner 0013-7882 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine collects the waste toner discharged from the outlets of three image forming units (drum cleaning unit, toner developing assembly, ITB cleaning unit) into the waste toner bottle.
Page 425: Waste Toner Full Detection
7.11.2 Waste Toner Full Detection 0013-8026 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine performs the following two detections to detect the waste toner level collected into the waste toner bottle. - Detection by the magnetic sensor - Detection by the waste toner counter The DC controller refers to these detection results for each print at power ON and opening/closing the front door.
Page 426 Chapter 7 *1: When the waste toner level is full, it should be judged as error. See the related error code for details. WASTE_TNR_FULL J1172 WASTE_TNR_ERR DC-CON PS63 < Back of the machine> F-7-98 [1] Drum cleaning unit exhaust outlet [2] Waste toner tube [3] Waste toner screw [4] Toner developing assembly exhaust outlet...
Page 427 Chapter 7 At alarming the full waste toner, printing can be continued in this machine. Detection by the waste toner counter The waste toner level collected into the waste toner bottle is calculated based on the image data sent from the main controller. This detection is performed when the waste toner level is 80% or more (after alarming full waste toner).
Page 428: Drum Heater
7.12.1 Drum Heater Control 0013-9681 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The sensitivity of the photosensitive drum varies due to the installation environment (temperature, humidity). This machine has the drum heater inside of the drum axis to keep the drum surface temperature stable.
Page 429: Itb Heater
7.13.1 ITB Heater Control 0013-9706 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This machine has ITB heater inside ITB to prevent the temperature reduction of the drum surface. The thermal reed switch inside the ITB constantly measures the ITB temperature. ITB temperature is controlled by repeating ON/OFF of the ITB heater.
Page 430 Chapter 7 F-7-101 [1] ITB [2] Thermal reed switch [3] ITB heater ITB heater control is activated by turning ON the environmental switch on the inside left side of the machine when the main switch is ON and also OFF. F-7-102 [1] Environmental switch Reference...
Page 431 Chapter 7 7-82...
Page 432: Parts Replacement Procedure
7.14 Parts Replacement Procedure 7.14.1 Process Unit 7.14.1.1 Preparation for Sliding the Processing Unit 0014-1119 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Detach the processing unit cover.
Page 433: Sliding The Processing Unit
Chapter 7 F-7-109 F-7-112 8) Hold down the claw [1] and then slide the fixing feeding unit. 7.14.1.3 Sliding the Processing Unit 0020-5127 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Remove the drum fixing mount [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-7-113 Points to Note When Attaching the Drum Fixtures When attaching the drum fixtures, be sure not to rotate the drum clockwise.
Page 434 Chapter 7 F-7-115 4) Remove the 5 screws [1]. F-7-119 8) Hold down the claw [1] and then slide the fixing feeding unit. F-7-116 5) Loosen the 3 processing link shafts [1]. Check to see that processing link shafts can be moved back and front. F-7-120 F-7-117 9) Slide the processing unit [1].
Page 435: Pre-Exposure Led Array
7.14.3 Preconditioning Exposure LED Unit 7.14.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED Unit 0013-9749 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Detach the processing unit cover.
Page 436: After Replacing The Primary Charging Assembly
Chapter 7 7.14.5 Primary Corona Grid Panel 7.14.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Grid Plate 0013-9727 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Detach the processing unit cover.
Page 437: Primary Corona Slider
7.14.8.1 Preparation for removing the Pre-transfer Corona Assembly 7.14.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Corona 0014-0562 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- Assembly Slider PRESS C1+ 0013-9731 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover.
Page 438: Removing The Pre-Transfer Corona Assembly Pad Folder
7.14.9.2 Removing the Pre-transfer corona assembly pad folder 0013-9734 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Pinch the hook [1] of the pre-transfer corona assembly pad holder to re- move the pre-transfer corona assembly pad holder [2] in the direction F-7-139 shown by the arrow.
Page 439: Photosensitive Drum
6) Detach the drum unit. (page 7-89)Reference [Removing the Drum Unit] 7.14.12.3 Removing the Photosensitive Drum 0013-9748 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the photosensitive rear fixing plate [1]. - 3 screws [2]...
Page 440: Seal Support Plate (Front)
7.14.13 Seal Support Plate (Front) 7.14.13.1 Preparation for Removing the Seal Support Plate (Front) 0013-9755 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the process unit cover.
Page 441: Scoop-Up Sheet Support Plate
7.14.15 Scoop-Up Sheet Support Plate 7.14.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Scoop-Up Sheet Support Plate 0013-9790 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the process unit cover.
Page 442: Removing The End Seal (Rear)
6) Detach the drum unit. (page 7-89)Reference [Removing the Drum Unit] 7.14.17.2 Removing the End Seal (Rear) 0013-9744 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 7.14.19.2 Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade PRESS C1+ 0013-9740...
Page 443: Removing The Sub Hopper Unit
Chapter 7 F-7-162 F-7-166 2) Detach the hopper right cover [1]. 7) Remove two toner retainer partitions [1]. - 1 screw [2] - 4 screws [2] F-7-163 3) Detach the hopper upper cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] F-7-167 8) Remove one connector [1] and one screw [2]. F-7-164 4) Rotate the knob of the toner retainer [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the lock.
Page 444 Chapter 7 - 6 screws [2] 7) Detach the hopper left inside cover [3]. - 4 screws [4] The sub hopper for Cyan is explained here as the example. The procedure is same for other colors. 1) Detach the hopper left cover [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-7-170 F-7-174...
Page 445: Procedure After Replacing The Sub Hopper Unit
7.14.20.4 Procedure after Replacing the Sub Hopper Unit removed. 0014-1297 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ It is not filled with the toner after replacing the sub hopper unit. When turn- ing on the power supply of the machine body, the error message 'No toner' is displayed.
Page 446: Development Clutch
7.14.22 Development Clutch 7.14.22.1 Preparation for Removing the Developing Clutch 0013-9395 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Detach the upper rear right cover. 2) Detach the upper rear cover. 7.14.22.2 Removing the Developing Clutch...
Page 447 Chapter 7 F-7-193 F-7-189 10) Remove the tensioner [1]. 6) Remove 40 connectors. - 1 spring [2] - 1 screw [3] F-7-190 7) Remove the main body rear exhaust fan duct [1]. F-7-194 - 1 connector [2] - 1 screw [3] Points to Note When Mounting the Tensioner In the case of mounting the tensioner, mount it with the spring [2] first, and then with the screw [3].
Page 448: Itb Cleaning Unit
Intermediate Transfer Unit] 7.14.23.2 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit 0013-9712 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the mounts (the front and the rear) [1]. - 4 screws [2] F-7-196 13) Detach the developing clutch cover [1].
Page 449: Intermediate Transfer Unit
7.14.24.1 Preparation for Removing the Intermediate - 4 screws [3] Transfer Unit 0014-0074 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Detach the process unit cover. 3) Lift the hopper unit.
Page 450: Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Unit
4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2]. 0013-9761 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 5) Press the gear [3] in the direction of the arrow to pull out the secondary PRESS C1+ transfer outer roller unit [4].
Page 451: Secondary Transfer Outside Roller Sub Unit
F-7-216 7.14.27 Intermediate Transfer Belt 7.14.27.1 Preparation for Removing the ITB 0013-9713 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Detach the process unit cover. 3) Lift the hopper unit.
Page 452: Primary Transfer Roller
7.14.28 Primary Transfer Roller 7.14.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Primary Transfer Roller 0013-9715 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Detach the process unit cover. 3) Lift the hopper unit.
Page 453: Secondary Transfer External Roller
7.14.30 Secondary Transfer Internal Roller 7.14.30.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Inside Roller 0013-9717 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Detach the process unit cover.
Page 454: Secondary Transfer Bias Roller Cleaning Blade
9) Remove the ITB cleaning unit. (page 7-99)Reference [Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit] 7.14.32.2 Removing the ITB Cleaner Brush (Large) 0013-9720 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Detach the ITB cleaner cover [1]. - 4 screws [2] F-7-228 7.14.31 Secondary Transfer Bias Roller Cleaning Blade...
Page 455: Itb Cleaner Brush (Small)
7.14.34 Secondary Transfer Roller Brush (Upper) 7.14.34.1 Preparation for Removing the Secondary Transfer Roller Brush (Upper) 0013-9773 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ F-7-233 1) Open the front cover. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward the front.
Page 456: Secondary Transfer Roller Brush (Lower)
10) Remove the ITB cleaner brush (large). (page 7-105)Reference [Re- 0013-9771 moving the ITB Cleaner Brush (Large)] imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 7.14.36.2 Removing the ITB Bias Roller Cleaning Blade 1) Open the front cover.
Page 457: Potential Sensor Unit
7.14.38.1 Preparation for Removing the Potential Sensor 7.14.38.3 Replacing the Potential Sensor Unit 0014-3687 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 0014-0064 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ PRESS C1+ When replacing the potential sensor, go through the following procedure.
Page 458: Atr Sensor Unit
12) Attach the potential sensor onto the main body. 7.14.39 ATR Sensor Unit 7.14.39.1 Preparation for Removing the ATR Sensor Unit 0014-2993 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Detach the processing unit cover.
Page 459: After Replacing The Atr Sensor
7.14.40 Drum Thermal Sensor Unit 7.14.40.1 Preparation for Removing the Drum Thermal Sensor Unit 0014-0066 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Detach the process unit cover.
Page 460: Patch Image Sensor
7.14.41.1 Preparation for Removing the Patch Image 7.14.42.1 Preparation for Setting Up Charging Wire Sensor Unit 0014-0978 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 0013-9759 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover.
Page 461: After Replacing The Primary Charging Wire
(FRONT) (REAR) 7.14.42.3 After Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 0014-3685 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ F-7-267 7) Cut the excess charging wire using a wire cutter. 1) Execute the primary charging wire cleaning from service mode.
Page 462 Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System...
Page 464 Contents Contents 8.1 Construction ...................................8-1 8.1.1 Specification/Control/Function ..............................8-1 8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers ................................8-2 8.1.3 Paper Delivery Path ..................................8-3 8.1.4 Arrangement of Sensors ................................8-4 8.1.5 Distribution of Drives ................................. 8-6 8.1.6 Interval Speed ....................................8-8 8.2 Basic Sequence ................................8-13 8.2.1 Cassette Feeding ..................................
Page 465 Contents 8.10 Parts Replacement Procedure............................ 8-58 8.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit ................................8-58 8.10.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit ..........................8-58 8.10.1.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit ................................8-58 8.10.2 Cassette Heater..................................8-59 8.10.2.1 Removing the Cassette Heater ..................................8-59 8.10.3 Cassette Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller ..........................
Page 466: Construction
Chapter 8 8.1 Construction 8.1.1 Specification/Control/Function 0012-8453 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-8-1 Item Function/Method Paper accommodation Front loading Pickup Cassette (1 to 4) Separation retard Manual feed tray Separation retard Paper feed reference Center reference Max.
Page 467: Arrangement Of Rollers
Chapter 8 8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers 0012-8455 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [3] [4] [5] [6] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [39] [15] [38] [37] [16] [36] [35] [17] [34] [18] [33]...
Page 468: Paper Delivery Path
Chapter 8 8.1.3 Paper Delivery Path 0012-8456 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ - Face-up delivery (straight delivery) F-8-2 - Face-down delivery (reversal delivery) F-8-3...
Page 469: Arrangement Of Sensors
Chapter 8 - Duplexing re-pickup F-8-4 8.1.4 Arrangement of Sensors 0012-8457 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ PS14 PS76 PS13 PS65 PS78 PS5,6 PS12 PS17 PS27 PS26 PS18 PS40 PS15 PS53 PS28 PS30...
Page 470 Chapter 8 PS5: OHT sensor (front) PS30: Cassette 1 paper sensor PS6: OHT sensor (rear) PS34: Cassette 2 pickup sensor PS9: Manual feeding paper sensor PS36: Cassette 2 paper sensor PS12: Registration front sensor PS40: Duplexing right sensor PS13: Secondary transfer PS41: Cassette 3 paper sensor rear sensor PS43: Cassette 3 pickup sensor...
Page 471: Distribution Of Drives
Chapter 8 8.1.5 Distribution of Drives 0012-8458 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ F-8-6 M5: Registration front motor M6: Registration motor M7: Outside delivery roller M8: Reversal motor M9: Duplexing left motor M11: Duplexing right motor...
Page 472 Chapter 8 F-8-7 SL1: Manual feeding solenoid SL2: Reversal roller separation solenoid SL3: Delivery flapper solenoid SL4: Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL5: Cassette 2 pickup solenoid SL6: Cassette 3 pickup solenoid SL7: Cassette 4 pickup solenoid...
Page 473: Interval Speed
Chapter 8 8.1.6 Interval Speed 0013-7511 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. Pickup Position to Registration Position a. In case of Cassette 2/3/4 pickup F-8-8 Interval Paper delivery speed 500 mm/sec 600 mm/sec...
Page 474 Chapter 8 Interval Paper delivery speed 500 mm/sec 255 mm/sec to 600 mm/sec (The time varies depending on the time required from the pickup start to the vertical path 1 sensor ON.) Normal speed mode: 500 mm/sec 1/3 speed mode: 285 mm/sec p1: Point of start of acceleration (vertical path 1 sensor) p2: Point of deceleration...
Page 475 Chapter 8 c. In case of manual feeding tray F-8-10 Interval Paper delivery speed Normal speed mode: 285 mm/sec 1/3 speed mode: 95 mm/sec (= processing speed) 2. Registration Position to Secondary Transfer Position F-8-11 Interval Paper delivery speed Normal speed mode: 600 mm/sec 1/3 speed mode: 200 mm/sec Normal speed mode: 285 mm/sec 1/3 speed mode: 95 mm/sec (=processing speed)
Page 476 Chapter 8 3. Secondary Transfer Position to Delivery Position a. In case of face-up delivery Accelerate the delivery to prevent the trail edge lapse at the delivery outlet due to the upward curl of a sheet. F-8-12 Interval Paper delivery speed Normal speed mode: 285 mm/sec 1/3 speed mode: 95 mm/sec (=processing speed) 314 mm/sec...
Page 477 Chapter 8 Interval Paper delivery speed Normal speed mode: 627 mm/sec 1/3 speed mode: 180 mm/sec 600 mm/sec Normal speed mode: 500 mm/sec 1/3 speed mode: 285 mm/sec p1: Point of start of acceleration (=a point where the trail edge reaches a point 20 mm downstream from the fixing nip area) p2: Point of start of deceleration (=point where a point 40 mm of the trail edge passes the delivery outlet) 8-12...
Page 478: Basic Sequence
Point of stop of duplexing re-pickup p5: Point of start of deceleration 8.2 Basic Sequence 8.2.1 Cassette Feeding 0012-8459 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ A4, plain paper, 2-sheet, Cassette 2 feeding, and face-up delivery STBY PRINT LSTR...
Page 479 Chapter 8 STBY PRINT LSTR Manual feeder holding plate solenoid (SL1) Manual feed pre-registration drive motor (M5) OHT light-emitting/receiving sensor _ front/rear (PS5/6) Registration drive motor (M6) F-8-16 8-14...
Page 480: Detecting Jams
Chapter 8 8.3 Detecting Jams 8.3.1 Jam Detection Outline 8.3.1.1 Overview 0012-8511 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-8-2 Jam code Sensor 01:Delay jam 02:Stationary jam 0A:Residual jam 0B:Door open jam XX01 Cassette 1 pickup sensor...
Page 481: Operation At Jam Occurrence
8.3.1.2 Operation at Jam Occurrence 0013-4479 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ <Operation When Detecting Delay/Stationary Jam> - The driving at upstream from the sensor that jam has been detected stops its operation, whereas the driving at downstream from the sensor stops after delivering papers.
Page 482: Other Than Cassette Pickup Assembly
0012-8463 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ In the case where the delay jam detection sensor N does not go on within a specific period of time after the sensor N-1 has gone on.
Page 483: Stationary Jams
8.3.3.1 Normal Stationary Jam 0012-8464 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ In the case where the sensor N does not go off within a specific period of time after the sensor N has gone on.
Page 484: Stationary Jam (Residual Jam) At The Power On
0012-8465 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Check to make sure if there is a residual paper within the machine at the time of the initial multiple rotation (after the power on, opening/closing the cover, or jam recovery).
Page 485: Cassette
8.4.1 Overview 0012-8468 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Hold papers with the trail edge guide plate [1] and the side guide plate [2]. In case of using index papers, mount the guide for the index paper [3], instead of using the trail edge guide plate [1].
Page 486: Paper Size Detection
8.4.2 Paper Size Detection 0012-8469 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Set the paper size using the cassette size dials [4]. When setting a cassette, depending on the setting of the cassette size dial [1], the switch (SW0 to SW3) of the cassette size detection PCB [2] turns ON/OFF. Based on the combination of ON/OFF, the paper size can be set up to 15 settings.
Page 487: Setting The Universal Cassette
13 x 19 8.4.3 Setting the Universal Cassette 0012-8470 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The default paper sizes in case of detecting the universal size setting are as follows: Paper setting group...
Page 488 Chapter 8 F-8-24 [1] Tray [5] Lifter motor [2] Paper level sensor flag [6] Lifter gear [3] Cassette paper level 1sensor [7] Cassette paper sensor [4] Cassette paper level 2 sensor [8] Flag - In case the paper is fully loaded 8-23...
Page 489 Chapter 8 - In case no paper is left in a cassette F-8-25 Paper level sensor 1 Display on the control Paper level sensor 2 [2] Paper sensor [3] Paper level panel 100% to about 50% of the capacity About 50% to 10% of the capacity Less than about 10% of the capacity...
Page 490: Cassette Pick-Up Unit
Chapter 8 8.5 Cassette Pick-Up Unit 8.5.1 Configuration 0012-8472 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ F-8-26 [1] Cassette pickup solenoid (SL4/SL5/SL6/SL7) [2] Cassette limit sensor (PS29/PS35/PS42/PS48) [3] Cassette lifter sensor (PS31/PS36/PS42/PS48) [4] Cassette pickup sensor (PS28/PS34/PS41/PS47)
Page 491: Behavior Of Pickup
8.5.3 Behavior of Pickup 0012-8594 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ In case of Cassette 1 Pickup Assembly 1) The cassette lifter is lifted with the cassette lifter motor 1 (M22), and the surface of a paper contacts with the cassette pickup roller 1 [1].
Page 492: Feeding Control (Cassette 1)
8.5.4 Feeding Control (Cassette 1) 0012-8664 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The distance between the Cassette 1 pickup position and the secondary transfer position is so short that the machine cannot secure time for pre-registration stop control.
Page 493: Pickup Control (Cassette 2 To 4)
8.5.5 Pickup Control (Cassette 2 to 4) 0012-8498 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ After the pickup, a paper is stopped at the specified position once, and then, is delivered to the point of the registration. (Pre-registration stop control) The pickup control is the control to make up for the variation in pickup (timing jam, delay jam) due to the paper type, size, and environmental condition, and keeping the constant reaching time of paper to the registration point.
Page 494: Manual Feed Pickup Unit
Chapter 8 8.6 Manual Feed Pickup Unit 8.6.1 Configuration 0012-8475 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [1] Manual feed extraction upper roller [2] Manual feed separation roller [3] Manual feed roller [4] Last paper sensor roller...
Page 495: Paper Size Detection
8.6.3 Paper Size Detection 0012-8477 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Paper width is detected by the output from the variable resistor coupled with the move of the slide guide. The width of the slide guide on the manual feed tray is adjusted by users by sliding the slide guide when setting paper.
Page 496: Last Paper Detection
0012-8478 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Last paper detection is performed so as not to form images within the ITB when the paper is out. Only when feeding the last paper, the last paper roller [1] rotates.
Page 497: Registration Unit
0012-8479 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The registration roller [1] is driven by the registration motor (M6), and controlled to turn ON/OFF so that the paper and the image on the intermediary transfer belt match on a specified position.
Page 498: Duplex Feeding Unit
0012-8480 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) The reversal solenoid (SL3) is turned OFF and the reversing flapper [1] is moved upward. The paper after fixing is fed to the reversal vertical path assembly.
Page 499 Chapter 8 4) The paper stops at the re-pickup standby position (leading edge of the paper at the position about 14mm downstream of the duplexing right roller [1]) and then fed to the registration assembly by the duplexing middle motor (M11) F-8-41 8-34...
Page 500: Side Registration Position Detection
0012-8481 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ At double-sided printing, in order to correct the displacement of the image position of the second side in the main scanning direction, side registration detection is performed and thus the laser write start position is corrected.
Page 501 Chapter 8 <Side Registration Detection Operation> 1) After detection of the home position, the side registration sensor (PS25) shifts to the 13x19 paper detection position. F-8-43 [1] Sensor plate [A] Center of the feeding assembly [B] Home position detection position (position 65 mm rear from the center of the feeding assembly) [C] 13x19 paper detection position (position 165 mm from the center of the feeding assembly) 2) The machine uses the side registration sensor to detect paper.
Page 502: A4 Size 5-Sheet-Circulation
Chapter 8 8.8.3 A4 size 5-Sheet-Circulation 0012-8482 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ F-8-46 F-8-47 F-8-48 [A] Duplexing reversal position 8-37...
Page 503 Chapter 8 F-8-49 F-8-50 [B] Duplexing re-pickup stop position F-8-51 8-38...
Page 504 Chapter 8 F-8-52 F-8-53 F-8-54 8-39...
Page 505 Chapter 8 F-8-55 F-8-56 F-8-57 8-40...
Page 506 Chapter 8 F-8-58 F-8-59 F-8-60 8-41...
Page 507 Chapter 8 F-8-61 8-42...
Page 508: A3 Size 3-Sheet-Circulation
Chapter 8 8.8.4 A3 Size 3-Sheet-Circulation 0012-8483 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ F-8-62 F-8-63 8-43...
Page 509 Chapter 8 F-8-64 [A] Duplexing reversal position F-8-65 8-44...
Page 510 Chapter 8 F-8-66 F-8-67 8-45...
Page 511 Chapter 8 F-8-68 F-8-69 8-46...
Page 512 Chapter 8 F-8-70 F-8-71 8-47...
Page 513 Chapter 8 F-8-72 [B] Duplexing re-pickup stop position F-8-73 8-48...
Page 514 Chapter 8 F-8-74 F-8-75 8-49...
Page 515: Delivery
Chapter 8 8.9 Delivery 8.9.1 Overview 0012-8484 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-8-11 Delivery Method Operation Mode Face-up delivery - When printing by 1-on-1 copying - When printing multi-copies from 1 sheet of original (Face-down delivery is used when the finisher is mounted)
Page 516 Chapter 8 PS17 F-8-77 8-51...
Page 517 Chapter 8 2) A specific time after the reversal inlet sensor (PS17) is turned ON, the edge of the paper reaches the duplexing reverse stop position (position about 18mm up- stream of the reversal vertical path sensor (PS18)), then the duplexing reversal motor (M10) stops. PS17 PS18 F-8-78...
Page 518 Chapter 8 5) When the edge of the previous paper exceeds 40 mm upstream of the reversal 1 roller [1], the reversal separation solenoid (SL2) is turned OFF to bring the reversal 1 roller [1] into contact. Subsequent paper is fed to the reversal stop position. F-8-81 8-53...
Page 519: Curl-Removing Operation (Decurler Unit)
Chapter 8 8.9.4 Curl-Removing Operation (Decurler Unit) 0012-9537 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ In the decurler assembly, paper curl generated after fixing is removed and then delivered outside of the machine. PS79...
Page 520 Chapter 8 F-8-83 [1] Decurler drive 1 roller [2] Decurler adjustment 1 roller [3] Decurler drive 2 roller [4] Decurler adjustment 2 roller [5] Decurler delivery roller [6] Decurler advancement adjustment 1 cam [7] Decurler advancement adjustment 2 cam <Principle> By advancing the decurler advancement adjustment roller (material: sponge) into the decurler drive roller (material: stainless steel), the decurler decreases the curl of paper passing between the rollers by making a curl on the opposite side against the existing curl.
Page 521 Chapter 8 3) The drive of the decurler advancement adjustment motor is transmitted to the decurler advancement adjustment cam. The advancement adjustment cam rotates to push the pressure plate. The decurler advancement adjustment roller which is coupled with the pressure plate is pressed to the decurler drive roller. (The figure shows the operation upstream of the decurler.) F-8-85 [1] Decurler advancement adjustment 1 cam...
Page 522 Chapter 8 0002 Indicates that the HP of the advancement adjustment 2 cam (downstream) cannot be detected within 2 sec. 8-57...
Page 523: Parts Replacement Procedure
8.10.1 Cassette Pickup Unit 8.10.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 0013-9371 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ A. In the case of Cassette 1 1) Detach the upper rear right cover.
Page 524: Cassette Heater
8.10.2 Cassette Heater 8.10.2.1 Removing the Cassette Heater F-8-95 0014-1127 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- Cassette 4 PRESS C1+ 1) Press the cassette release button [1] to take out the cassette 1 and 2 [2].
Page 525: Cassette Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller
8.10.3.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller 0013-9632 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the upper/lower right cover [1] to pull out the cassette. A. In the case of cassette 1 Pull out the cassette 1 [2] and the cassette 2 [3].
Page 526: Manual Feed Separation Roller
8.10.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Manual Separation Roller F-8-114 0013-9645 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 8.10.6 Horizontal Registration Assembly PRESS C1+ 8.10.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Horizontal 1) Remove the manual feed roller. (page 8-60)Reference [Removing the...
Page 527: Pre-Fixing Feeding Unit
Feeding Unit 4) Remove the registration unit cable [1]. 0014-1131 - Edge saddle [2]: 1 pc. imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- - Wire saddle [3]: 2 pc. PRESS C1+ - Connector [4]: 2 pc.
Page 528: Removing The Pre-Fixing/Feeding Unit
C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Feeding Unit 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. 0014-0086 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 2) Remove the fixing pin [2]. PRESS C1+ - 1 screw [3] 1) Open the front door.
Page 529 Chapter 8 [Removing the fixing/feeding unit] 1) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the fixing assembly. 3) Remove the handle [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-8-127 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit [1] toward you. F-8-130 4) Detach the feeding front cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] F-8-131 F-8-128...
Page 530: Buffer Decurler
F-8-134 8.10.9 Buffer Decurler 8.10.9.1 Removing the Decurler 0014-0570 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- F-8-138 PRESS C1+ 5) Open the decurler front cover [1]. 1) Detach the panel mount cover [1] attached to the upper left cover (rear).
Page 531: Decurler Adjustment Roller (Upper)
8.10.10 Decurler Adjustment Roller (Upper) 8.10.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Decurler Sponge Roller (upper) 0013-9780 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ F-8-144 4) Detach the upper left cover [1]. 1) Remove the decurler. (page 8-65)Reference [Removing the Decurler] - 3 screws [2] 8.10.10.2 Removing the Decurler Sponge Roller (upper)
Page 532: Decurler Adjustment Roller (Lower)
8.10.11.1 Preparation for Removing the Decurler Sponge Roller (lower) 0013-9777 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the decurler. (page 8-65)Reference [Removing the Decurler] 8.10.11.2 Removing the Decurler Sponge Roller (lower)
Page 533 Chapter 8 [3] [4] [4] [3] F-8-154 8-68...
Page 534 Chapter 9 Fixing System...
Page 535 Contents Contents 9.1 Construction ...................................9-1 9.1.1 Specifications/Control/Function ..............................9-1 9.1.2 Major Components (Section) ............................... 9-2 9.1.3 Major Components (Thermistor / Thermal switch) ........................9-3 9.1.4 Major Components (Sensor/Solenoid)............................9-4 9.1.5 Control System Configuration ..............................9-5 9.1.6 Fixing Roller/Belt Drive Control ..............................9-8 9.2 Basic Sequence ................................9-10 9.2.1 At Power-On ....................................
Page 536 Contents 9.7.6 External Heat Roller .................................. 9-44 9.7.6.1 Preparation for Removing the External Heat Roller............................. 9-44 9.7.6.2 Removing the External Heat Roller................................9-44 9.7.6.3 When Replacing the External Heat Roller..............................9-44 9.7.7 Oil Applying Roller ................................... 9-44 9.7.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Oil Coating Roller ............................9-44 9.7.7.2 Removing the Oil Coating Roller .................................
Page 537 Contents 9.7.24.2 Removing the External Heater ..................................9-56 9.7.25 Fixing Web....................................9-57 9.7.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web..........................9-57 9.7.25.2 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web................................9-57 9.7.25.3 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web................................9-58 9.7.25.4 After Replacing the Fixing Cleaning Web..............................9-59 9.7.26 Insulating Bush ..................................9-59 9.7.26.1 Preparation for Removing the Insulating Bush ............................9-59 9.7.26.2 Removing the Insulating Bush ..................................9-59 9.7.26.3 After Replacing the Insulating Bush ................................9-59...
Page 538: Construction
Chapter 9 9.1 Construction 9.1.1 Specifications/Control/Function 0012-0960 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-9-1 Item Description Fixing Method by lower fixing belt Heater inside fixing roller 2pc (main heater/sub heater; integrated type) Inside inlet roller 1pc.
Page 539: Major Components (Section)
Chapter 9 9.1.2 Major Components (Section) 0012-0961 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [17] [16] [11] [10] [12] [14] [18] [19] [13] [15] F-9-1 Construction Characteristics/Function/Method Remarks Fixing roller Fixing of toner onto the sheet...
Page 540: Major Components (Thermistor / Thermal Switch)
Chapter 9 9.1.3 Major Components (Thermistor / Thermal switch) 0013-3281 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ THM6 THM5 THM2 THM4 THM1 THM3 F-9-2 Component Notation Function/Method Main thermistor Fixing roller THM1 Non-contact (temperature control, detection of rapid temperature rise)
Page 541: Major Components (Sensor/Solenoid)
Chapter 9 9.1.4 Major Components (Sensor/Solenoid) 0013-3282 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ PS61 SL11 PS67 PS11 PS15 PS59 PS62 PS14 PS60 PS66 PS22 F-9-3 Notation Component PS11 Web roller attach/detach sensor PS14...
Page 542: Control System Configuration
Chapter 9 9.1.5 Control System Configuration 0012-0963 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ <drive system> PS11 SL11 PS22 PS66 PS15 PS14 PS67 PS61 PS60 PS59 PS62 J3304 J3316 J3314 J3310 J3308 J3303 J3305...
Page 543 Chapter 9 <Heater-Thermal Switch> J1803 J1812 J1804 UN35 F-9-5 Fixing main heater Thermal switch (fixing roller) Fixing sub heater Thermal switch (fixing belt) Inlet heater Thermal switch (outside heater) Outside heater UN35 AC driver PCB...
Page 544 Chapter 9 <thermistor> THM6 THM5 THM2 THM4 THM1 THM3 J1803 J1804 F-9-6 THM1 Main thermistor (fixing roller) THM5 Main thermistor (outside heater) THM2 Sub thermistor (fixing roller) THM6 Sub thermistor (outside heater) THM3 Main thermistor (fixing belt) DC controller PCB THM4 Sub thermistor (fixing belt)
Page 545: Fixing Roller/Belt Drive Control
9.1.6 Fixing Roller/Belt Drive Control 0012-6437 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The diagram shows the configuration of the control system of the fixing roller and fixing belt drive system. Fixing motor (M38) is driven at 285 mm/sec for constant velocity print, and 95 mm/sec for 1/3 print.
Page 546 Chapter 9 Warm-up / Print F-9-8 - The fixing belt is pressed by the fixing roller. - The fixing roller and the fixing belt are driven by the fixing motor (M38). Stand-by F-9-9 - The fixing belt is separated from the fixing roller. - The fixing motor (M38) is stopped.
Page 547: Basic Sequence
Chapter 9 9.2 Basic Sequence 9.2.1 At Power-On 0012-0964 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ <First Power-ON> In case the surface of the fixing roller is < 50 deg C Interval Description WMUP1 From when the power is turned on until the fixing roller surface temperature reaches 100 deg C.
Page 548: Print (Constant Speed)
Chapter 9 9.2.2 Print (Constant Speed) 0012-0965 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ - In the case of plain paper (=/<105g/m2) Interval Description STBY (standby) Ready for a print request signal <Control Temperature>...
Page 549: Print (1/3-Speed)
Chapter 9 9.2.3 Print (1/3-Speed) 0012-8141 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ - In the case of thick paper (>105g/m2) - OHT Interval Description STBY(standby) Ready for a print request signal <Control Temperature>...
Page 550: Various Control Mechanisms
9.3.1.1 Down Sequence 0012-8135 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ <Execution Condition> - When printing at Black/White or Normal Speed mode, the surface temperature of the fixing roller goes down to the specified temperature.
Page 551: Power Save Mode
0012-8134 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ In the case of power save mode (power save mode/low power save mode/sleep mode), target temperature is set low at standby, and power saving is enabled by the...
Page 552 Chapter 9 The inlet sensor flag of the fixing assembly is equipped with a mechanism that moves up and down in keeping with the locking/unlocking of the fixing belt unit. It moves up when the power is ON or when the jam is cleared (when unlocking of the fixing belt unit) to detect residual paper. During printing (when adding pressure to the fixing belt unit), it is located below the surface of paper passage in order not to affect the feeding performance of the paper.
Page 553 Chapter 9 Paper Paper size Detection for the wrap Detection for the residual Heavy paper Less than B5 Available Available B5 or more Available Available 9-16...
Page 554: External Heat Roller Drive Control
0013-7877 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The external heat roller has a built-in heater. At the time of warm-up, printing, or the last rotation, it's heated by contacting the fixing roller to support controll of fixing temperature.
Page 555 Chapter 9 Error code: E842 (External heat roller detached/attached error) 0001 In the case that the HP sensor fails to detect within 5 sec after detecting the home position. 0009 Indicates that a hardware detecting mechanism has detected that the external heat roller has remained in contact with the fixing roller for 300sec or more. 0011 In the case that the HP sensor is logically misplaced when executing operation.
Page 556: Belting Inclined Control
0013-3295 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Fixing belt tends to be displaced during the drive. During the drive of the fixing belt, fixing belt position is always detected to control its location to be in the center.
Page 557 Chapter 9 <Content of Control> 1) Before starting the fixing belt drive, home position detection is executed for the steering roller shaft position (skew). The position where the sensor flag [1] located on the steering roller shaft crosses the light path of the fixing belt displacement control HP sensor (PS60) is the home position. PS60 F-9-18 2) The position of the fixing belt is detected by the sensor arm [2] that locks the edge of the fixing belt [1], and by the fixing belt displacement control sensor (front/...
Page 558 Chapter 9 PS62 PS62 PS62 PS62 PS62 PS59 PS59 PS59 PS59 PS59 F-9-20 [A] Center [B] Displaced in the rear [C] Displaced in the front [D] Further displaced in the rear from the position of [B] [E] Further displaced in the front from the position of [B] 3) In the case of detecting the position of [B] or [C] indicated above, move the fixing belt to the center.
Page 559: Belt Pressurizing Mechanism
0013-7876 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The fixing belt is equipped to lock/unlock against the fixing roller in accordance with the state of the printing or standby. The drive of the fixing belt detached/ attached motor (M34) communicates to the swing shaft so the fixing belt unit itself moves up and down, and the fixing belt lock/unlock the fixing roller.
Page 560 Chapter 9 [2] Swing shaft PS67: Fixing belt attached sensor [3] Fixing belt UN4: Fixing driver PCB [4] Fixing belt unit [5] Fixing belt unit support base FIX_BELT_CONT_HP_SNS: Fixing belt home position signal M34: Fixing belt detached/attached motor FIX_BELT_CONTACT_SNS: Fixing belt attached detecting signal 9-23...
Page 561: Fixing Cleaning Web Mechanisms
0013-3410 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ To avoid fixing offset, the residual toner found on the fixing roller is first collected on the collecting roller, and then removed by the cleaning web (maybe with silicone oil).
Page 562: Control Of The Fixing Cleaning Web Length Detection
9.5.2 Control of the Fixing Cleaning Web Length Detection 0013-3411 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The following is the method to detect cleaning web length and the content of control. 1) During the initial phase of use, the fixing web, which is wrapped around the web take-up roller, is wrapped by the web take-up roller as the copy/print are made.
Page 563: Detached/Attached Mechanism Of The Cleaning Web (Web Roller)
0013-7725 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ In the case of cleaning the fixing roller, the cleaning web is locked/unlocked to the collecting roller by the web roller. When the fixing roller is under suspension, the web roller is unlocked from the collecting roller to avoid heat-caused deformation of the fixing roller.
Page 564 Chapter 9 J3307 1 2 3 4 FX_WEB_CONT_HP_SNS J3306 PS11 F-9-27 [1] Swing shaft [2] Web roller [3] Collecting roller [4] Fixing roller M33: Web attach/detach motor PS11: Web attach/detach HP sensor UN4: Fixing driver PCB FX_WEB_CONT_HP_SNS: Web attach/detach HP signal Positioning of Web Roller [A] In-contact while the fixing roller is in operation.
Page 565: Refresh Roller Attach/Detach Mechanism
0013-7859 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ By bringing the refresh roller into contact with the fixing roller, remove scratches on the surface of the fixing roller caused by continuously feeding the large amount of the small size paper (smaller than A4/LTR).
Page 566: Protective Functions
* By selecting COPIER>OPTION>BODY>IMGC-ADJ, and set 'IMGC-ADJ' as '1', items will be displayed on the 'Device management Setting' screen. 9.6 Protective Functions 9.6.1 Protective Circuit 0012-0992 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ DC controller PCB ASIC Fixing motor lock signal...
Page 567 Chapter 9 Protection methods Functions Triac deactivation control block Fixes the heater ON signal as OFF using ASIC in case a fixing system error occurs. Hardware timer Activates the timer when the ASIC control clock stops and [1], [2], [6] are not function properly. 9-30...
Page 568: Related Error Code
Chapter 9 9.6.2 Related Error Code 0012-0997 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-9-3 E-code Main cause Detail code Detail Recovery method E000 Heating delay error 0001 Indicates that the temperature does not increase after the specified time has FUNCTION>CLEAR>E...
Page 569 Chapter 9 E-code Main cause Detail code Detail Recovery method E004 Fixing Main Thermistor short- 0101 Indicates the open-circuit detection at the film side of the fixing main circuit/open-circuit error thermistor. 0102 Indicates the short-circuit detection at the film side of the fixing main thermistor.
Page 570 Chapter 9 E-code Main cause Detail code Detail Recovery method E197 Fixing unit communication error 0002 The communication error occurs 10 times in succession during the process of the communication initialization sequence between the DC controller and the fixing delivery unit. 0003 The communication error occurs 10 times in succession after the completion of the initialization sequence between the DC controller and the...
Page 571: Parts Replacement Procedure
9.7.1 Fixing Drive Unit 9.7.1.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Drive Second Gear 0014-7995 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 572: Fixing Unit
9.7.2 Fixing Unit 9.7.2.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Assembly Unit 0014-0229 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you. 9.7.2.2 Removing the Fixing Assembly Unit...
Page 573: Removing The Fixing Assembly Unit
Chapter 9 F-9-44 6) Remove the 5 edge saddles [1], the 3 clamps [2], and the 6 connectors [3]. F-9-47 9.7.2.3 Removing the Fixing Assembly Unit 0020-5130 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Open the external delivery cover [1]. F-9-48 2) Open the internal delivery cover [1].
Page 574 Chapter 9 - 2 stepped screws [2] - 1 screw [3] F-9-54 F-9-51 5) Remove the web roller unit [1]. - 2 screws [2] Disconnect the connector [2] of J3313 with the connector hook surely held. 8) Remove the exhaust duct [2]. Push the claw [1] F-9-52 6) Remove the 5 edge saddles [1], the 3 clamps [2], and the 6 connectors [3].
Page 575: Fixing Belt Unit
9.7.3 Fixing Belt Unit 9.7.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Belt Unit 0014-0174 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 576 Chapter 9 6) Open the fixing upper unit [1] in the direction of the arrow. - 2 clamps [2] - 2 edge saddles [3] - 5 connectors [4] F-9-63 7) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] and remove the 2 screws [2]. F-9-65 9) While pulling the belt tension area [1] in the direction of the arrow [A], pull out the belt [2] in the direction of the arrow [B].
Page 577: Preparation For Removing The Fixing Separation Roller Ball Bearing
3) Remove the fixing main heater/fixing sub heater. (page 9-54)Reference [Removing the Fixing Main Heater/the Fixing Sub Heater] 9.7.4.2 Removing the Fixing Roller 0014-0187 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the fixing roller [1]. - 2 C-rings [2]...
Page 578 Chapter 9 - Make sure to wipe off the excessive grease because the grease adheres to the both edge [1] of the fixing roller when mounting the greased bushes to the fixing roller. F-9-74 Remedy for Fixing Belt Replacement F-9-72 The fixing belt may be displaced while rotating.
Page 579: Fixing Belt
Chapter 9 9.7.5 Fixing Belt 9.7.5.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Belt 0014-0176 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 580: After Replacing The Fixing Belt
Chapter 9 9.7.5.3 After Replacing the Fixing Belt 0014-4440 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ Before installing a belt, apply silicon oil (S-20; FY9-6011) to the marked area of the pressure pad cover (within the radius of about 200 mm from the center).
Page 581: External Heat Roller
9.7.6.1 Preparation for Removing the External Heat 9.7.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Oil Coating Roller Roller 0014-0189 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 0014-0221 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door.
Page 582: Fixing Web Roller
F-9-91 9.7.9 Fixing Web Roller 9.7.9.1 Preparation for Removing the Web Roller 0014-0191 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ F-9-95 1) Open the front door. 5) Remove the web roller unit [1].
Page 583: Removing The Web Roller
F-9-103 9.7.10 Refresh Roller 9.7.10.1 Preparation for Removing the Refresh Roller 0014-0193 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you. 9.7.10.2 Removing the Refresh Roller...
Page 584 Chapter 9 F-9-104 2) Open the internal delivery cover [1]. F-9-108 6) Pull out the external pressure roller assembly [1] in the direction of the ar- row. - 2 screws [2] F-9-105 3) Detach the fixing front cover [1]. - 3 screws [2] F-9-109 7) Shift the refresh roller unit [1] in the direction shown by [A], and slide it out in the direction shown by [B].
Page 585: Removing The Refresh Roller
Chapter 9 F-9-115 5) Remove the web roller unit [1]. F-9-111 - 2 screws [2] 9.7.10.3 Removing the Refresh Roller 0020-5435 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Open the external delivery cover [1]. F-9-116 6) Pull out the external pressure roller assembly [1] in the direction of the ar- row.
Page 586: Steering Roller
After attaching the refresh roller unit, draw the sheet [3] out. 9.7.12.2 Removing the Pressure Pad 8) Remove the refresh roller [1]. 0014-0181 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- - 2 E-rings [2] PRESS C1+ - 1 gear [3] - 3 bearings [4] 1) Remove the pressure pad [1].
Page 587: After Replacing The Pressure Pad Cover
F-9-124 9.7.13.3 After Replacing the Pressure Pad Cover 0014-6123 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ Before installing a belt, apply silicon oil (S-20; FY9-6011) to the marked area of the pressure pad cover (within the radius of about 200 mm from the center).
Page 588: Outside Heating Main Thermistor
9.7.17 Outside Heating Sub Thermistor 9.7.17.1 Preparation for Removing the External Heat Sub Thermistor 0014-0202 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ F-9-130 1) Open the front door. 9.7.16 Outside Heating Main Thermistor 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 589: Inlet Thermistor
9.7.18 Inlet Thermistor 9.7.18.1 Preparation for Removing the Inlet Main Thermistor/Sub Thermistor 0014-0182 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 590: Thermal Switch
9.7.21 Fixing Belt Thermal Switch 9.7.21.1 Preparation for Removing the Belt Thermal Switch 0014-1220 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 591: Fixing Main Heater/Fixing Sub Heater
- 1 screw [3] 9.7.22.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Main Heater/the Fixing Sub Heater 0014-1190 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 592: Inlet Heater
9.7.23 Inlet Heater 9.7.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Belt Inlet Heater 0014-0227 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 593: Fixing Locking Heater
F-9-162 9.7.24.1 Preparation for Removing the External Heater 0014-0219 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- Points to Note When Removing/Mounting the External Heater PRESS C1+ In the case of removing/mounting the external heater, take care not to scratch the surface of the roller as indicated in the figure below.
Page 594: Fixing Web
Chapter 9 9.7.25 Fixing Web 9.7.25.1 Preparation for Removing the Fixing Cleaning 0014-0198 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 595: Removing The Fixing Cleaning Web
Chapter 9 - 2 stepped screws [2] - 1 screw [3] F-9-176 5) Remove the web roller unit [1]. - 2 screws [2] F-9-172 9.7.25.3 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web 0020-5436 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Open the external delivery cover [1] F-9-177 6) While pushing the web feed roller [1] and the web take-up roller [2] in the direction of the arrow, remove the fixing cleaning web [3].
Page 596: After Replacing The Fixing Cleaning Web
F-9-179 9.7.25.4 After Replacing the Fixing Cleaning Web 0013-3407 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ Set the value clear '0' for the following service counters. - COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-WEB 9.7.26 Insulating Bush...
Page 597: Lower Separation Claw
9.7.28 Lower Separation Claw 9.7.28.1 Preparation for Removing the Lower Separation Plate 0014-0217 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you.
Page 598: Delivery Upper Separation Plate
- 2 screws [1] Plate - 2 fixing pins [3] 0014-1228 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front door. 2) Pull out the fixing/feeding unit toward you. 9.7.29.2 Detaching the Upper Separation Plate...
Page 599 Chapter 10 Externals and Controls...
Page 600 Contents Contents 10.1 Control Panel................................10-1 10.1.1 Overview....................................10-1 10.1.2 LCD Function ..................................10-1 10.1.3 Contrast Adjusting Function ..............................10-1 10.1.4 Function of Control Panel CPU ............................... 10-1 10.2 Counters ..................................10-1 10.2.1 Overview....................................10-1 10.2.2 Count increment timing ................................10-3 10.3 Fans ....................................10-3 10.3.1 Fan......................................
Page 601 Contents 10.5.1.14.1 Preparation for Removing the Process Unit Cover......................... 10-15 10.5.1.14.2 Removing the Process Unit Cover..............................10-15 10.5.2 Hopper Drive Unit ................................. 10-15 10.5.2.1 Preparation for Pulling Up/Removing the Hopper Unit ........................... 10-15 10.5.2.2 Pulling the Hopper Unit Up ..................................10-15 10.5.2.3 Pulling the Hopper Unit Up ..................................
Page 602 Contents 10.5.20.1 Preparation for Removing the Backside Driver PCB ..........................10-35 10.5.20.2 Removing the Backside Driver PCB...............................10-35 10.5.21 Primary Suction Fan ................................10-35 10.5.21.1 Removing the Air Filter ..................................10-35 10.5.22 Ozone Filter (Right) ................................10-36 10.5.22.1 Removing the Ozone Filter (Right).................................10-36 10.5.23 Ozone Filter (Left) ................................
Page 603: Control Panel
10.1.1 Overview 0014-1311 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The control panel of this machine consists of the PCBs, the LCD, and the touch panel described in the figure below. The followings show major functions of this machine:...
Page 604 Chapter 10 T-10-1 Model Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8 100V (*1) Total 1 Total (BW 1) Copy (Full Copy (Full (Default not (Default not (Default not (Default not colour + mono- colour + mono- displayed) displayed)
Page 605: Count Increment Timing
10.2.2 Count increment timing 0014-3730 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The count increment timing differs according to whether printing is single sided or duplex and whether there is a finisher mounted. 1. Single sided print, duplex second page Count increment for single sided print and the second page of duplex print takes place when the following sensors detect that the trailing edge of the paper has exited the device.
Page 606 Chapter 10 FM22 FM20 FM26 FM10 FM27 FM18 FM28 FM25 FM16 FM23 FM19 FM29 FM17 FM11 FM12 FM13 FM14 FM15 F-10-2 T-10-3 Numbe Symbo 2-speed E-code/Alarm Name Function Filter control code Primary Charging Inspiration Fan Inspiration from outside to the primary charging E824-0000 assembly Primary Exhaust Fan...
Page 607: Sequence Of Fan Operation
[27] FM29 air intake fan 2 air cleaning of external area of the machine 10.3.2 Sequence of Fan Operation 0014-1314 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 10-5...
Page 608: Power Supply
0014-5904 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The DC power of the machine is supplied from the printer power supply PCB. The power of accessories is also supplied from the printer power supply PCB.
Page 609 Chapter 10 Name Function Environment switch PCB Turn ON/OFF the power for the drum heater, ITB heater, reader heater (*1), cassette heater (*2), and deck heater (*1). DC/DC converter PCB 1 Supply DC power to the main controller PCB and DC controller PCB. Main power switch Turn ON/OFF the AC power for the printer power supply PCB.
Page 610: Protection Function
10.4.2.1 Protective Functions 0014-1316 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The machine's DC power supply PCB and those of its accessories are equipped with protective functions against excess current and voltage, which will automati- cally cut off the output voltage in response to an error power condition (caused, for example, by a short-circuit on a load).
Page 611 Chapter 10 - press on the Power Save key Conditions Initiating a Shift Back to Standby Mode (power save -> standby) - press on the Power Save key - press on the control panel power switch 3. Low Power Mode The machine keeps the temperature of the fixing assembly low (100 deg C), with the reader unit and the printer unit supplied with a reduced level of power.
Page 612: Snmp Setup
10.4.4.2 SNMP setup 0014-1319 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ When the machine is used as a Windows printer, enabling 'Use SNMP' causes the operating system to collect machine status information at specific intervals, pre- venting the machine from starting a sleep state.
Page 613: Parts Replacement Procedure
10.5.1 External Covers 10.5.1.1 Front Cover 10.5.1.1.1 Front Cover Opening 0014-0583 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover [1]. F-10-10 5) Remove one grounding terminal screw [1], and one reuse band [2].
Page 614: Right Lower Cover
10.5.1.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Right Lower Cover F-10-15 0014-0360 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 10.5.1.6 Upper Left Cover PRESS C1+ 10.5.1.6.1 Preparation for Removing the Left Upper 1) Remove the right upper cover. (page 10-11)Reference [Removing the...
Page 615: Left Middle Cover
10.5.1.8 Left Middle Cover 10.5.1.8.1 Preparation for Removing the Left Middle Cover 0014-0355 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the decurler. 2) Remove the left upper cover. (page 10-12)Reference [Removing the Left Upper Cover] 10.5.1.8.2 Removing the Left Middle Cover...
Page 616: Left Rear Cover (Lower)
10.5.1.11 Rear Upper Cover 10.5.1.11.1 Removing the Rear Upper Cover F-10-24 6) Remove five connectors [1]. 0014-0587 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove two reader communication cable connectors [1]. F-10-28 F-10-25 2) Remove the rear upper cover [1].
Page 617: Toner Replacement Cover
10.5.1.13 Toner Replacement Cover Unit 10.5.1.13.1 Toner Replacement Cover Opening 0014-0576 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 0014-0584 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover.
Page 618 Chapter 10 F-10-35 4) Remove the hopper right cover [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-10-38 7) Remove one hopper left fixing screw [1]. F-10-36 5) Remove two harnesses [2] from the clamp [1]. F-10-37 6) Remove one hopper right fixing screw [1]. F-10-39 8) Pull the hopper unit [1] up in the direction of the arrow until it hits.
Page 619: Pulling The Hopper Unit Up
Chapter 10 F-10-42 2) Open the toner replacement cover [1]. F-10-43 F-10-40 3) Remove the hopper left cover [1]. - 1 screw [2] Points to Note When Lifting Up the Hopper Unit - In case the copyboard cover is attached, make sure to open it prior to lifting up the hopper unit to prevent any damages caused by contact.
Page 620: Removing The Hopper Unit
F-10-50 10.5.2.4 Removing the Hopper Unit 0014-0578 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 1) Pull the hopper unit shutter lever [1] forward to the end. F-10-48 8) Pull the hopper unit [1] up in the direction of the arrow until it hits.
Page 621 Chapter 10 F-10-51 F-10-55 2) Open the toner replacement cover [1]. 6) Open the right upper cover [1]. 7) Remove the right door small cover [1]. - 1 cover rubber [2] - 2 screws [3] F-10-52 3) Remove the hopper left cover [1]. - 1 screw [2] F-10-56 8) Remove one hopper right fixing screw [1].
Page 622: Removing The Hopper Unit
Chapter 10 F-10-61 10.5.2.5 Removing the Hopper Unit 0020-5438 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Pull the hopper unit shutter lever [1] forward to the end. F-10-58 10) Remove two hopper right fixing screws [1]. F-10-62 2) Open the toner replacement cover [1]. F-10-59 11) Remove two hopper left fixing screws [1].
Page 623 Chapter 10 F-10-65 5) Remove the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1], and remove three con- nectors [3]. F-10-68 9) Remove one hopper left fixing screw [1]. F-10-66 6) Open the right upper cover [1]. 7) Remove the right door small cover [1]. - 1 cover rubber [2] - 2 screws [3] F-10-67...
Page 624: Dc Power Supply Unit
10.5.3 DC Power Supply Unit 10.5.3.1 Preparation for Removing the Power Supply Assembly 0013-9320 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- F-10-75 PRESS C1+ 10.5.4 Sub DC Power Supply 1) Remove the rear upper cover. (page 10-14)Reference [Removing the Rear Upper Cover] 10.5.4.1 Preparation for Removing the Sub DC Power...
Page 625: Control Panel
F-10-77 10.5.5 Control Panel 10.5.5.1 Removing the Control Panel 0013-9407 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Lean the control panel [1] in the direction of the arrow. F-10-81 4) Remove the lock hinge cover L [1].
Page 626 Chapter 10 F-10-84 6) Remove the arm cover 4 [1] from the back of the arm unit. - 1 screw [2] F-10-88 9) Remove one screw [1] from the backside of the control panel. F-10-85 7) Remove the control panel interface cable [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 1 clamp [3] F-10-89...
Page 627: Dc Controller Pcb
10.5.6 DC Controller PCB 10.5.6.1 Preparation for Removing the DC Controller PCB 0013-9302 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the right rear upper cover. (page 10-12)Reference [Removing the Right Rear Upper Cover] 2) Remove the rear upper cover.
Page 628: After Replacing The Dc Controller Pcb
10.5.7 Leakage Breaker 10.5.7.1 Preparation for Removing the Leakage Breaker 0013-9405 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the decurler. 2) Remove the left upper cover. (page 10-12)Reference [Removing the...
Page 629: Dc/Dc Converter Pcb
Chapter 10 10.5.8.2 Removing the RD-DC-DC PCB 0013-9618 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the RD-DC-DC PCB [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - 4 screws [3] F-10-105 F-10-102 3) Remove three clamps [1], five faston terminals [2] and two connectors [3].
Page 630: Removing The High-Voltage Box Unit
Chapter 10 F-10-110 F-10-107 2) Remove the left exhaust fan [1] with the duct. 3) Remove the fixing upper exhaust fan [1] with the duct. - 1 connector [2] - 1 connector [2] - 1 screw [3] - 1 screw [3] F-10-108 4) Pull the high-voltage box unit [1] out forward, and remove it.
Page 631: Hv1 Pcb
- 1 connector [4] 0013-9329 5) Remove the cable [5] from the edge saddle [6]. imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the right rear upper cover. (page 10-12)Reference [Removing the Right Rear Upper Cover] 2) Remove the right rear lower cover.
Page 632: Hv3 Pcb
10.5.12 HV5 PCB 10.5.12.1 Preparation for Removing the HV5 PCB 0013-9348 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the right rear upper cover. (page 10-12)Reference [Removing the Right Rear Upper Cover] 10.5.12.2 Removing the HV5 PCB...
Page 633: Hv8 Pcb
3) Remove one grounding terminal screw [1] and one reuse band [2]. 4) Remove the harness [4] from one wire clip [3], and remove one connector 0013-9362 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- [5]. PRESS C1+ 1) Move the registration guide unit [1].
Page 634: Feeding Driver Pcb
10.5.15 Feeding Driver PCB 10.5.15.1 Preparation for Removing the Feeding Driver 0013-9403 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. (page 10-11)Reference [Front Cover Opening] 2) Pull out the fixing feeder unit.
Page 635: Ac Driver Pcb
4) Remove the 2 connectors [1], and remove the AC driver PCB [2]. 10.5.16.1 Preparation for Removing the AC Driver PCB 0013-9288 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the rear lower cover. (page 10-14)Reference [Removing the Rear Lower Cover] 10.5.16.2 Removing the AC Driver PCB...
Page 636: Decurler Driver Pcb
10.5.18 Decurler Driver PCB 10.5.18.1 Removing the Decurler Driver PCB 0013-9776 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover [1] and remove the left lower cover [2]. - 5 screws [3]...
Page 637: Backside Driver Cover
Chapter 10 3) Remove the controller box. 10.5.20.2 Removing the Backside Driver PCB 0013-9402 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the backside driver PCB [1]. - 10 connectors [2] - 5 screws [3] F-10-148 6) Remove nine clamps [1].
Page 638: Ozone Filter (Right)
Chapter 10 10.5.23 Ozone Filter (Left) 10.5.23.1 Preparation for Removing the Ozone Filter (Left) 0014-1134 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the decurler. 10.5.23.2 Removing the Ozone Filter (Left) 0014-1135...
Page 639: Ozone Filter (Lower Left)
Chapter 10 10.5.26 Ozone Filter (Rear) 10.5.26.1 Removing the Ozone Filter (Rear) 0014-1140 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the rear fan cover [1]. - 3 screws [2] F-10-161 2) Remove the ozone filter (left upper) [1].
Page 640: Toner Filter (Right)
10.5.29.1 Preparation for Removing the Toner Filter (Left) 0014-1143 10.5.28.1 Removing the Toner Filter (Right) imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 0014-1142 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the decurler.
Page 641: Toner Filter (Rear)
3) Remove the toner filter (left) [2] from the filter case [1]. F-10-175 10.5.30 Toner Filter (Rear) 10.5.30.1 Removing the Toner Filter (Rear) 0014-1145 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1) Remove the rear fan cover [1]. - 3 screws [2] F-10-176 2) Remove the filter case [1].
Page 642 Chapter 11 MEAP...
Page 644 Contents Contents 11.1 MEAP..................................11-1 11.1.1 Changes....................................11-1 11.1.2 Checking the Operating Environment............................. 11-1 11.1.3 Setting Up the Network ................................11-4 11.1.4 Login to SMS ................................... 11-6 11.1.5 Setting the method to login to SMS ............................11-7 11.1.6 Checking Application List ..............................11-11 11.1.7 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application ..........................
Page 646: Meap
11.1.1 Changes 0021-3005 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Changes to configuration of login application Changes have been made to the configuration of the login application since the iR3245 series. Details of the changes are as follows.
Page 647 Chapter 11 Domain authentication management In order to use domain authentication in SSO-H, the following sytem environments are required. - The following Windows servers are installed under Active Directory, and DNS server for name resolution. - Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4 - Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1 - Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 - Windows 2000/2003 Domain Name System (DNS) access privileges...
Page 648 Chapter 11 System environments for administrator and ordinary user (when using IPv6 communication) Operating System Supported browser Java Runtime Environment Windows XP Professional Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2, Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.3or later Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7: Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.3or later...
Page 649: Setting Up The Network
0018-6613 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ To allow a MEAP device to accept accesses through the network, for example you operate a device with SMS, the On option must be selected on Use HTTP screen.
Page 650 Chapter 11 F-11-1 2) Make the following selections: [MEAP Settings] button > [Use HTTP] button> [On] button > [OK] button . F-11-2 MEMO: When using SSL, set [Use SSL] ON. (This setting is also applied to the SSL setting of RUI. Same is true in the case of setting SSL ON on the side of RUI.) Setting [Use SSL] ON displays the message dialogue 'Changes effective after the main power switch is turned OFF and ON' .
Page 651: Login To Sms
11.1.4 Login to SMS 0018-6615 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication).
Page 652: Setting The Method To Login To Sms
- When using SDL as the login service, enter the user information registered in the device, as per local device authentication. - Only the following users may us SMS via RLS. - In the case of domain authentication, users belonging to the Canon Peripheral Admins Group. - In the case of local device authentication, users registered with Administrator privileges.
Page 653 Chapter 11 The SMS login method settings are done by setting the login Start/ Stop via the other login method. In other words, the password authentication Start/ Stop setting is done by first logging in with RLD authentication, and the RLS authentication Start/ Stop setting is done by first logging in with password authentication. The Start/ Stop combinations of the two login methods are as follows.
Page 654 Chapter 11 2) Select [System Management] tab > [Utility] tab > [Application Management Function] tab. F-11-8 3) Enter a check mark against the SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) radio button and click on either Start or Stop. Check that the status has changed accordingly.
Page 655 Chapter 11 4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. When password authentication has been set to Start, the password entry window will now be displayed. If password authentication has been set to Stop, when an attempt is made to log in, the error message shown below will be displayed and login will not be possible.
Page 656: Checking Application List
0018-6616 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The page of Application List is designed to show resources arranged according to applications. The page gives you a good idea of how much of the device's memory is being used by the applications (both in absolute and relative terms) as well as how much memory still remains.
Page 657: Starting And Stopping A Meap Application
11.1.7 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application 0018-6617 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Log in to the SMS. (Refer to 'Login to SMS' in this manual.) 2) Click [Application List]. (If the Application List is already being displayed, this operation is not necessary.) 3) Click the radio button of the MEAP application in question, and click [Start] or [Stop].
Page 658: Checking The Platform Information
11.1.8 Checking the Platform Information 0018-6618 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ You can check the versions of MEAP Contents, MEAP Specifications, and Java Virtual Machine of the device. Some applications may not be installed to some MEAP devices of specific specifications. (See 'MEAP Specifications').
Page 659: Meap Specifications
11.1.9 MEAP Specifications 0018-6619 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the function.
Page 660 Chapter 11 Product Name USA EUR OCE SPL KOR CCNT Initial MEAPSpecVer MEAPSpecVer after Firmware Upgrade iR 6570 5, 6 5, 6, 7, 9 (System v20.xx later) iR 5570 5, 6, 7, 9, 17(System v38.XX later) iR 5070 iR C3170 5, 6, 7 iR C2570 iR 7105...
Page 661: Mfid
11.1.10 MFID 0021-2990 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ What is MFID? In earlier MEAP applications, operation was clearly limited to those models whose Device Specification ID (DID) had been declared. However, this method means that, when a new model is launched, MEAP applications cannot be installed until the DID declaration described above is added.
Page 662 Chapter 11 This means that existing MEAP applications can now be installed into new models without being altered. MFID display sample F-11-19 T-11-16 MFID definitions MFID Overview Correspondence situation of iR3245 series MB10 MEAP basic functions (Java VM, OSGi, etc.) UIM10 UI functions (VGA size) LO10...
Page 663: Checking The System Information Of A Meap Application With Sms
F-11-20 11.1.11 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS 0018-6620 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Log in to SMS. 2) Click [System Management] tab. 3) On System Management screen, click [System Info] tab.
Page 664: Printing The System Information Of A Meap Application
F-11-22 11.1.12 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application 0018-6621 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Make the following selections: [Additional Functions] button > [System Settings] button> the down-arrow button. MEMO: If the System manager ID and system password have already been assigned, ID Entry dialog appears after System Settings button is pressed.
Page 665: Reference (Application System Information)
0018-6622 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ You can check all applications installed to the device at a glance with the MEAP application status information and, thus, it is important for you to provide it when you are reporting a problem.
Page 666: Installing An Application
0018-6624 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ - To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the license access number of the application and the serial number of the device.
Page 667 Chapter 11 2) Click [Install] tab. F-11-25 3) Check that Install Application/License page appears. 4) Click [Browse] button, and select the application file and the license file of the application; then, click [OK] button. MEMO: Application File: identified by the extension "jar". License File: identified by the extension "lic".
Page 668: Meap Enterprise Service Manager
MEAP-available devices on network. The main targets are system administrators in big companies and CANON service engineers (end users of devices do not use). It is used when customized applications delivered to a certain company needs to be managed collectively.
Page 669: Adding A License File
11.1.16 Adding a License File 0018-6627 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Log on to SMS. 2) On Application List, click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file.
Page 670 Chapter 11 4) On Application Information page, click [License Management] button. F-11-30 5) Click [Browse] button, and select the license file you want to install. F-11-31 6) Click [Install] button. F-11-32 7) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click [OK] button. 11-25...
Page 671: Disabling A License File (Suspending A License)
11.1.17 Disabling a License File (suspending a license) 0018-6628 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ - To invalidate (or suspend) a license, you must first stop the application in question. - Once suspended, the status of the license will be 'Not Installed', and its application will no longer be available for use.
Page 672: Downloading/Removing An Invalidated License File
0018-6629 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ You must remove the invalidated license file before uninstalling an application. If re-installation is a possibility, you may download the license file to a PC for storage.
Page 673 Chapter 11 3) On Application List page, click the name of the application you want. F-11-37 4) Check Application Information page appears. 5) On Application Information page, click [License Management] tab. F-11-38 6) License Management page appears. To download, click [Download] button. F-11-39 7) When you have selected [Download] button, specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen.
Page 674: Reusable License
11.1.19 Reusable license 0018-6632 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Reinstallation was not able to perform for all license files. When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see 'Disabling a License File' and 'Down- loading / Removing an Invalidated License File' in this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation.
Page 675 Chapter 11 2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (http:// IP address of device: 8000/sms/ForwardLicense). F-11-42 3) Specify the application to be forwarded. F-11-43 4) Click [Create] at Create Transfer License File. F-11-44 11-30...
Page 676 Chapter 11 5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [OK]. F-11-45 6) Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading. Click [Download]. F-11-46 7) The dialogue [Open] is displayed. Click [Save]. F-11-47 11-31...
Page 677: Uninstalling An Application
0018-6634 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ - The status of the license must be 'Not Installed' or 'Unnecessary' for its application to be uninstalled. As necessary, go to License File Management page, and disable the license file before starting to remove it.
Page 678: Login Service
0021-2967 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The login service is used to authenticate the user when a MEAP device is booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the 'System Management' page.
Page 679 Chapter 11 entered using the MEAP device touch panel display and Remote UI. SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview This is a merger of the existing SDL and SSO login services and has the following features. - Both the domain authentication and local device authentication login services can be used. - There is no need to have a separate SA server.
Page 680 Chapter 11 F-11-51 Local device authentication This is an authentication method that is used for single iR devices. The authenticating users are registered in the iR device's database. User management is performed on the Web application provided by the device, or from the imageWARE Enterprise Management Console/ iW Management Console. The login destination is 'This device'.
Page 681 System administrator linkage (automatic allocation of ID to administrator) [Restriction] With SSO, there was a function where ID programmed on SA would be allocated to domain authentication administrators (Canon Peripheral Admins Group users) on SA, and system administrators automatically authenticated, but with SSO-H this is now unsupported.
Page 682 Chapter 11 Site internal access mode process diagram DomainX 4.Access same Site : Tokyo DNS server A site AD. 172. 24. 12. 0/24 records: 172. 24. 35. 0/24 DC-Tokyo/DNS AD 192.168.1.2 1. Initial settings, 172. 24 . 12 . 2 AD 172.24.12.2 site list acquisition, Site : Osaka...
Page 683: Changing Login Services
Functionality merged with SSO-H, so will not be released stand alone in future. 11.1.23 Changing Login Services 0018-6635 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Steps to Change Login Services 1) Make the following selections: [System Management] > [Enhanced Sys. App].
Page 684: Initializing The Password
1) Get the switch license for initializing the password. Request the support of the regional headquarters of the Canon for switch license for initializing the password presenting the device serial number. 2) Click [Login] button leaving Password field blank or entering incorrect password. The Return to install Password Settings area appears. Click [Browse..] button and select the switch license file prepared in advance.
Page 685: Replacing The Hard Disk Drive
If you cannot make a backup of the license files as hard disk suffers a fault, contact the support staff of the regional headquarters of Canon telling the device serial number and the names of MEAP applications installed to the device to obtain the necessary special license files.
Page 686: Setting Http Port For Meap Application (Level 2)
0018-6640 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ For the ports in which the MEAP application uses, the default is 8000 for the port on HTTP server, and 8443 for the port on HTTPS server. In the case that these ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s).
Page 687 Chapter 11 Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8443] MEMO: -As for port on HTTPS server, it only applies to the device that supports SSL function. -Make sure not to use 1 through 1023 other than 80 (HTTP) as a port for MEAP. Because the ports in this range are used by general servers, there is a possibility that the ports in this range will be duplicated in the future.
Page 688 Chapter 11 9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power. F-11-64 <Setting Procedure of port on HTTPS server> 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).
Page 689: Usb Keyboard Support (Ir3245 Series Only)
- As regards MEAP applications that can use MEAP standard software keyboards, the USB keyboard can be used along with native functionality. * The SSO, SSO-K and SDL Login applications provided by Canon Inc. use software keyboards, so they are able to use USB keyboards.
Page 690 Chapter 11 - When saving an image to USB memory, time stamps and user signatures cannot be added. - Operation from remote UI and image preview are not supported. - The only supported USB memory is that which conforms to USB compliance tests. - USB memory with security settings (passwords, etc.) are not supported.
Page 691: Reference Material
*NB: In the Japan and Europe models of iR3245, the default value is ON, so this setting is not displayed. (The display of this setting can be switched ON/ OFF in service mode.) 11.1.31 Reference material 0018-6642 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 11-46...
Page 692 Esplet Type Application. A type of MEAP application that does not have a user interface on the device console or on the web browser. The term of "Esplet" is a coinage by Canon inspired from Applet, Servlet, and "Espresso". File descriptor With a file descriptor, an OS identifies the files that a program accesses.
Page 693: Option For Exclusive Individual Measure
11.1.32 Option for exclusive individual measure 0018-6643 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ -Display Setting of Copy Tab Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel. This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel.
Page 694 Chapter 11 Setting Procedure 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again.
Page 695 Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection...
Page 697 Contents Contents 12.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ............................12-1 12.1.1 Overview....................................12-1 12.1.2 Reader Unit ....................................12-1 12.1.3 Printer Unit....................................12-1 12.2 Durables and Consumables ............................12-4 12.2.1 Overview....................................12-4 12.2.2 Reader Unit ....................................12-4 12.2.3 Printer Unit....................................12-4 12.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure........................12-8 12.3.1 General Procedure for Scheduled Servicing ..........................
Page 699: Periodically Replaced Parts
0012-1972 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis to maintain a specific level of machine performance. (They could significantly affect the perform- ance once they fail, regardless of external change or damage.)
Page 700 Chapter 12 [27] [10] [13] [14] [16] [15] [29] [12] [11] [29] [28] F-12-1 12-2...
Page 701 Chapter 12 [18] [17] [20] [22] [24] [24] [26] [23] [21] [25] [19] F-12-2 12-3...
Page 702: Durables And Consumables
0012-1979 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the period of product warranty because of deterioration or damage. Replace them as neces- sary by referring to the following guide: 1.Checking the Timing of Replacement...
Page 703 Chapter 12 As of September, 2006 Number Number The name of part The Number of part The target of durability Remarks of pieces Cassette separation roller FC7-0155-000 12.5 thousand sheets Actual No. of sheets [30] (Use one piece for each cassette) Manual feed roller FB1-8581-000...
Page 704 Chapter 12 [10] [11] [12] [14] [15] [13] F-12-3 12-6...
Page 705 Chapter 12 [20] [24] [23] [34] [33] [35] [19] [31] [18] [32] [25] [22] [33] [35] [21] [36] [16] [17] [21] [26] [29] [30] [29] [30] [29] [30] [29] [30] [27] [28] F-12-4 MEMO: - For the target of replacement, the center value of evaluation result data is written. The number of part may be changed due to design change, etc. 12-7...
Page 706: Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
12.3.1 General Procedure for Scheduled Servicing 0012-1982 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ - The scheduled servicing should be basically implemented per 25,000 sheets. - Check the service book when going for the scheduled servicing. Bring it when the parts replacement may be necessary.
Page 707: Scheduled Servicing List Printer Unit
The previously described value is an estimated value, and may change due to experimental data. 12.3.3 Scheduled Servicing List Printer Unit 0013-4444 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Do not use the solvent/oil other than the specified one. MEMO: The meanings of marks used in the subsequent chart are as follows.
Page 708 Chapter 12 Name of unit Item Implementation items Number of sheets Position to install / area to clean Developing cylinder E At installation Developing assembly ATR sensor window 75,000 sheets*5 [22] Developing cylinder cover 75,000 sheets*5 [23] Transfer system Potential guide plate C 75,000 sheets*5 [17] Pre-Transfer Charging Duct Seal...
Page 709 Chapter 12 Perform basically dry-wipe with lint-free paper. *1: 18,000-sheets at H/H condition (High temperature/High Humidity condition). *2: The pre-transfer charging duct seal indicates the seal attached at the side of the pre-transfer charging assembly. *3: Make sure to clean the secondary transfer downstream guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. Also, in order to prevent soil to the secondary transfer outer roller, the guide should be cleaned after removing it from the secondary transfer outer roller unit.
Page 710 Chapter 12 [13] [14] [16] [17] [19] [18] [15] [20] [21] F-12-6 - Cleaning method of ATR sensor window ([22] at the figure above) 1) Remove the ATR sensor from the host machine. 2) Press the plunger [1] of the ATR sensor solenoid in the direction of the arrow. 3) Clean the ATR sensor window [2] and the sensor shutter [3] with lint-free paper.
Page 711 Chapter 12 (2) Periodic Maintenance T-12-5 Implementat Unit Name Item Description ion items Hopper Toner receiving/supplying mouth 250,000-sheets Checking at Fixing web installation Cleaning prohibition B_Replace at 500,000-sheets Fixing main thermistor Replace at Fixing sub thermistor 500,000-print A_100,000-sheets B_500,000- Inlet main thermistor sheets A_100,000-sheets B_500,000- sheets...
Page 712: Cleaning
12.4 Cleaning 12.4.1 Cleaning for secondary transfer rear guide 0012-1986 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Open the front cover. 2) Pull out the fixing feeder assembly. 3) Clean ribs one by one, from left to right by lint-free paper soaked with alcohol solution, as the arrow in the following chart.
Page 713: Cleaning Of Registration Roller, Registration Guide And Transparency Sensor
12.4.2 Cleaning of registration roller, registration guide and transparency sensor 0012-1987 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Pull out the fixing feeder assembly. 2) Push the leaf springs of both ends, pull out more the fixing feeder assembly.
Page 714: Cleaning For Buffer Decurler
12.4.3 Cleaning for buffer decurler 0021-2294 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Open the buffer decurler. Then, clean 2 sponge rollers [1], 1 feed roller (upper) [2] and 1 feed roller (lower) [3] using lint-free paper moistened with alcohol solution.
Page 715 Chapter 12 F-12-18 12-17...
Page 716 Chapter 13 Standards and Adjustments...
Page 718 Contents Contents 13.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ...........................13-1 13.1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1............................13-1 13.1.2 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 2............................13-1 13.1.3 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3............................13-2 13.1.4 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4............................13-3 13.2 Scanning System ................................13-5 13.2.1 After Replacing the CCD Unit..............................
Page 720: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
13.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 13.1.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 1 0016-2240 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The basic procedure of image adjustment is written to below. START Replace the ITB belt or the drum.
Page 721: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3
Note 4: Replacing the transfer system roller (primary transfer roller, secondary transfer roller) Replacing the HVT (HVT 2 to 4, 8 to 9) 13.1.3 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 3 0016-2245 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 13-2...
Page 722: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4
2. Replace the HV1 high-voltage PCB. F-13-3 Note 1: Execute the service mode: Full-page halftone (COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE=5). 13.1.4 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 4 0016-2247 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 13-3...
Page 723 Chapter 13 Are the densities of Y, M and C Is there any color whose DENS-S normal in visual check? value is -20 or less? Replace the Bk developing assembly. Is there any color whose DENS-S value is -20 or less? Are the values of DENS of Y, M and C within 20? Is the surface of the ATR sensor...
Page 724: Scanning System
CCDU-GB CCDU-RG 13.3.1 After Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 0014-0380 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 1) Execute the primary charging wire cleaning from service mode. (primary charging wire cleaning: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN) 13.3.2 After Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly...
Page 725: Replacing The Potential Sensor
5) Turn OFF/ON the main power. 13.3.3 Replacing the Potential Sensor 0014-0479 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 When replacing the potential sensor, go through the following procedure. The potential sensor and the potential control PCB are adjusted in pairs. Re- placement of them must be performed at the same time.
Page 726: After Replacing The Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN). 13.3.10 After Replacing the Patch Image Reading Sensor 13.3.5 After Replacing the Waste Toner Box 0014-8933 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- 0014-0800 PRESS C1+ imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 Run the following items in the Service Mode after replacing the patch image 1) Attach the new waste toner box onto the main body.
Page 727: After Replacing The Fixing Roller
F-13-20 0013-3398 [1] pressure pad cover imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 13.4.4 After Replacing the Fixing Cleaning Belt - Apply approx. 20 mg of grease (Molykote HP-300; CK-8012) to the bush-...
Page 728: When Replacing Pressure Belt Unit-Related Durable Parts
Durable Parts F-13-27 0020-8937 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / im- 1-5) Apply 0.1ml of silicone oil at the center (30mm inside from the both agePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ ends) on the surface of the inlet roller and spread it out evenly using the paper slip.
Page 729: Electrical Components
30mm 13.5.2 After Replacing the Main Control PCB (main) 0014-3732 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ F-13-28 After replacing the main control PCB (main), restore the PCBs removed pri- 1-6) Turn the inlet roller so that the oil-coated surface is hiding inside the or to the replacement.
Page 730: After Replacing The Hdd
13.5.4 After Replacing the HDD 0014-3735 Character on the label DF-S-NK input value imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ 1. If NSA (Net Spot Account) is not used: 1) Formatting the HDD Start the equipment to the SafeMode (turn on the main power pressing 2+8 key).
Page 731: Registering Paper Width Standard Value At Manual Feeder Tray
3) Tighten the screw. 13.6.3 Registering Paper Width Standard Value at Manual Feeder Tray 0013-3424 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / image- PRESS C1+ Execute registering paper width standard value for each paper size (A4R/A4/ A6R).
Page 732 Chapter 14 Correcting Faulty Images...
Page 733: Void Occurs In Sub Scanning Direction Upon Installation: Atr Shutter Solenoid Cable Comes Into Contact With Developing
Contents Contents 14.1 Making Initial Checks ..............................14-1 14.1.1 Installation Environment................................14-1 14.1.2 Checking of Paper..................................14-1 14.1.3 Checking of Paper Setting ............................... 14-1 14.1.4 Checking of the Durable Parts ..............................14-1 14.1.5 Checking of the Periodically Replaced Parts........................... 14-1 14.1.6 Checking of Each Unit/Checking Item of Each Function System................... 14-1 14.1.7 Others .......................................
Page 734: When Saddle Finisher-Aa2 Saddle-Stitches 12X18 Size Papers, Paper Folding Position Does Not Align With Paper Stapling
Contents 14.3.1.7.4 Hue variation occurs in continuous copy job performed right after replacement of photosensitive drum........14-20 14.3.1.7.5 Faulty hue (yellowish) image is output when copying pinkish original................... 14-20 14.3.1.7.6 Faulty hue image is output after executing quick auto gradation adjustment (printer PASCAL)............ 14-20 14.3.1.7.7 Gradation changes after shading correction............................
Page 735: Outline Of Electrical Components
Contents 14.3.7.5 E020-01A9: ATR shutter malfunctions ..............................14-38 14.3.7.6 E021-0001 appears on machine without Power Supply Unit-S1: Connector or jumper connector is discontinued ........14-38 14.3.7.7 E025-0102: J301D connector of hopper motor has poor contact ......................14-39 14.3.7.8 E025-0004 occurs when replacing drum..............................14-39 14.3.7.9 E025-0102: Connector of Yellow toner supply screw HP sensor (PS68) has poor contact ..............14-40 14.3.7.10 E061-0001/E061-0015/E061-0009: Potential Sensor PCB is faulty ......................14-40 14.3.7.11 E061: How to perform '0' level adjustment after replacing potential sensor PCB..................14-40...
Page 736: Making Initial Checks
14.1.2 Checking of Paper 0013-4592 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ - Check if Canon-recommended paper is used. - Check if the paper is moistened. Try to make prints by setting paper taken out from a new package.
Page 737: Others
0013-4599 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ It can cause various problems to suddenly move a machine that has been standing in a location such as a freezing warehouse to a warm room as it leads to internal dew formation.
Page 738: Selecting The Test Print Type
- (for R&D) 14.2.3 Selecting the Test Print TYPE 0013-4602 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1) Set number of prints and paper size. 2) Select the followings in service mode: COPIER > TEST > PG 3) Make the following selections: COPIER >...
Page 739: Grid (Type=6)
F-14-2 14.2.6 Grid (TYPE=6) 0013-4605 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ This test print can mainly check color displacement, right angle accuracy and linearity. (1) Color displacement If there is color displacement, it may be caused by fault of each laser scanning system, transfer (intermediate transfer/secondary transfer) unit or photosensitive drum drive unit.
Page 740: Gradation (Type=12)
F-14-4 14.2.8 64-Gradation (TYPE=12) 0013-4608 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ YMCBk64 gradation test print can mainly check gradation performance of each color (YMBCk) at one time. F-14-5 14.2.9 Full Color 16-gradation (TYPE=14)
Page 741: Troubleshooting
14.3.1.1.1 When printing on CLC extra heavy paper (209g), light image occurs at solid black areas of output image 0018-5273 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description When printing on CLC extra heavy paper (209g), light image or uneven density occurred at solid black areas on the output image.
Page 742: Uneven Density
14.3.1.2.3 Uneven density appears at 4mm intervals in main scanning direction 0019-8552 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since uneven density occurred at 4mm intervals in the main scanning direction, the 23T/45T gear [A] and the 35T/46T gear [B], which are found in the drum I.T.B drive assembly, were replaced with new ones at the same time for solution.
Page 743: Image Displacement/Out Of Focus
14.3.1.3 Image Displacement/Out of Focus 14.3.1.3.1 Smeared image/hue variation (variation of drum potential) occurs in humidity environment 0015-7361 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since a machine installed in a humidity environment caused smeared image or hue variation, the drum temperature switch (SW16) was set to "H"...
Page 744: When Duplex Printing, Position Of Image On Both 1St And 2Nd Sides Is Displaced In Sub Scanning Direction
14.3.1.3.3 When duplex printing, position of image on both 1st and 2nd sides is displaced in sub scanning direction 0017-6782 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ]...
Page 745: Developing Cylinder
14.3.1.4.2 Void occurs in sub scanning direction upon installation: ATR shutter solenoid cable comes into contact with developing cylinder 0015-8161 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [Inspected by Canon Inc.] Description Since the tie-wrap [1] binding the ATR shutter solenoid cable was fitted in the wrong position, the cable went slack and came into contact with the developing cylinder, causing void in the sub scanning direction.
Page 746 14.3.1.4.3 Measure against scratches made on Fixing Roller in circumferential direction: Lines appear in sub scanning direction 0016-5604 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When lines appear because of scratches made on the fixing roller in the circumferential direction, suspect dirty stays and shafts around the roller.
Page 747 14.3.1.4.4 Lines (smeared image): Mylar comes off post duct in P-kit assembly 0019-5457 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]...
Page 748 14.3.1.4.5 In low temperature environment, void occurs at border between halftone area and solid image area 0020-0709 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ]...
Page 749 14.3.1.5.1 Yellow vertical stripes on copy images/blank image on PG test chart printouts: PF-A board is faulty 0016-2167 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]...
Page 750 14.3.1.5.4 Soiled back: A failure in cleaning the secondary transfer roller is caused 0018-4124 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since soiled back occurred, the DC controller software was upgraded for solution.
Page 751 Chapter 14 Do the following steps to remedy the above symptom: 1. Check to see if there is any mistake of attaching the seal support plate (front, rear). Check if the seal support plate [2] is below the scoop-up sheet [1], and make a correction if it is not. In the case of mistakenly attaching, perform operation to attach after replacing the new scoop-up sheet.
Page 752 F-14-22 14.3.1.6 Ghost / Memory 14.3.1.6.1 Fixing Gloss Ghost 0015-0916 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Symptom When making a copy of solid color image, a ghost image may occur. Cause When making a copy of solid color image, wax included in toner may be exuded and attached onto the fixing assembly.
Page 753 14.3.1.7.1 At scanner reading upon installation, faulty image occurs: S-B Board PCB has poor contact 0015-7235 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description When placing an original on the copyboard glass and then making a copy to check the image quality upon installation, a faulty image occurred;...
Page 754 FM2-7362 S-B Board PCB Assembly 14.3.1.7.2 Hue variation occurs: OFST value (target value) for PASCAL is changed 0015-7355 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description During servicing, the value for the service mode [OFST] under [PASCAL] was changed to adjust the density of each color, and then auto gradation correction was performed.
Page 755: Hue Variation Occurs In Continuous Copy Job Performed Right After Replacement Of Photosensitive Drum
14.3.1.7.4 Hue variation occurs in continuous copy job performed right after replacement of photosensitive drum 0016-2816 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description Although there was no problem with images when performing the auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment) right after replacement of the photosensitive drum, hue variation was confirmed between the 1st and 100th copies in making 100 copies continuously.
Page 756: Gradation Changes After Shading Correction
14.3.2.1.1 Misalignment of output paper/jam occurs after replacement of swing guide assembly (Finisher-AA1/AA2) 0018-0753 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, paper misalignment or a paper jam occurred after replacement of the swing guide assembly (4G3-1541).
Page 757: Paper Misalignment Occurs When Stapling: Return Guide Sheet Of Finisher-Aa1/Aa2 Has Ridden On Operation Tray Bin
14.3.2.1.2 Paper misalignment occurs when stapling: Return Guide Sheet of Finisher-AA1/AA2 has ridden on Operation Tray Bin 0020-7526 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, when using staple mode, the trail edge of paper was skewed a little at the operation tray, causing paper misalignment.
Page 758: In Booklet Printing, Paper Misalignment/Unstapled Sheet Problem Occurs With 2Nd Page And Later: Stack Delivery Rollers Of Finisher Aa1/Aa2 Lack Pressure
14.3.2.1.3 In booklet printing, paper misalignment/unstapled sheet problem occurs with 2nd page and later: Stack delivery rollers of Finisher-AA1/AA2 lack pressure 0021-4963 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description During a booklet-printing job, a Finisher unit failed to pull the 2nd sheet of paper back to the process tray correctly, consequently causing the sheet to misalign within the stack.
Page 759 Chapter 14 F-14-32 5) Loosen the 2 fixing screws [1] of the registration unit. F-14-33 6) Move the registration unit based on the skew amount measured in Step 2). The skew amount is changed by 0.2 to 0.3mm every time the registration unit is moved by one scale. *When the skew amount of the paper at the position [A] is large, move the registration unit in the direction [B].
Page 760: Wrinkle
14.3.2.2 Wrinkle 14.3.2.2.1 Wrinkles appear on output paper: Pad cover wears out 0018-1585 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description Since wrinkles appeared on printed paper, the pressure pad and pad cover of the fixing belt assembly were replaced with a new one for solution.
Page 761: Malfunction
14.3.3.1 No Power 14.3.3.1.1 No power/E805-0014: Cable of DC Controller PCB causes wire-pinching 0016-2877 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description Since the cable at the bottom side of the DC Controller PCB was caught by the cover, no power was supplied. In this field case, this machine indicated the error code "E805-0014"...
Page 762: On Initial Copy Screen, "Black" Cannot Be Set As Standard Setting For Auto-Color Select Mode: Forced Secure Watermark Mode Is Set To On
14.3.3.3.1 Message "Adjusting gradation. Please wait a moment." persists on machine with DC Controller software Ver. 7.08 0016-3646 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description A machine of which system software was of version earlier than 7.08 and the service mode [TEMP-TBL] (mode for the fixing temperature control) was set...
Page 763: During Copying, Paper Jam Suddenly Occurs And E748-4901 Follows Power-Off/On Operation
14.3.3.3.3 When Saddle Finisher-AA2 saddle-stitches 12x18 size papers, paper folding position does not align with paper stapling position 0018-7052 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When saddle-stitching 7 sheets of 12x18 size paper, the paper folding position did not align with the paper stapling position.
Page 764: Atr Error (E020-Xxxx) Display Due To Dirt On Atr Sensor Window
14.3.3.3.6 ATR Error (E020-XXXX) Display due to Dirt on ATR Sensor Window 0014-8102 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Cause The waste toner may adhere on the ATR sensor window or the sensor shutter. As a result of that, it may be faultily detected as ATR sensor fault and trigger the ATR sensor error (E020-XXXX).
Page 765: Atr Error (E020-Xxxx) Display At The Time Of Drum Replacement
14.3.3.4.1 When connecting RUI (using same PC and IP address) upon replacement of machine, message "(!) A error has occurred" is displayed in IE browser 0015-7322 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description When trying to connect the Remote UI with the same IP address in use after replacing this machine, the message "(!) A error has occurred"...
Page 766: Message "Waste Toner Container Full. Call Service Representative." Does Not Disappear: Part Counter Is Not Cleared
14.3.3.5.2 Hard disc (HDD) cannot be formatted: Version of selected Format file is not suitable for HDD 0019-8551 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description When installing a new hard disc drive and then formatting its hard disc with SST, an error occurred (in the SST side) and formatting ended in failure.
Page 767: Part Breakage/Detachment
14.3.4.1.1 Ping Failure: When executing Ping command, message "No response from the host" appears due to WINS configuration error, 0021-0118 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description Since the scope ID had been set under Additional Functions >...
Page 768: Jam (Main Unit)
14.3.4.1.2 Ping Failure: When executing Ping command, message "No response from the host" appears due to Ethernet driver configuration error 0021-1616 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description In the field, there was a case where this machine failed to detect the Ethernet driver automatically, and therefore, did not execute the Ping command.
Page 769 14.3.5.2 011B Jam Code occurs at delivery assembly only when using small size paper (smaller than A4/LTR): Backside Driver PCB is faulty 0018-1055 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since "001B"...
Page 770 14.3.6.1 179F Jam Code occurs when running saddle jobs with double-face glossy (coated) heavy paper and Saddle Finisher-AA2 in use 0017-6705 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description Since a saddle job was performed using out-of-specification double-face glossy heavy paper, paper feed timing was delayed, and therefore the jam code "179F"...
Page 771 - When checking the front screw, remove the front cover of the fixing assembly. 14.3.7.3 E014-0003: Load is applied to fixing roller drive assembly 0016-3647 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since machines having a serial number earlier than the following did not have an appropriate space between the flange of the one-way gear (FU6-0646) in the rear side of the fixing assembly and the push-on area of the rear fixing gear (FU6-0651), torque was increased, ultimately causing the error code "E014-...
Page 772 14.3.7.4 E014-0003 : Due to ball bearing breakage in fixing belt drive assembly 0021-4613 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Ball bearing [1] equipped to the fixing belt drive shaft was broken, resulting heavy load on the belt drive motor and E014-0003 occurrence.
Page 773: E020-01A9: Atr Shutter Malfunctions
FM2-2478 Fixing Belt Drive Assembly 14.3.7.5 E020-01A9: ATR shutter malfunctions 0015-8722 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description Since the ATR shutter malfunctioned, the error code "E020-01A9" was indicated.
Page 774: E025-0102: J301D Connector Of Hopper Motor Has Poor Contact
4. Poor contact of J1198 connector of the DC Controller PCB. 14.3.7.7 E025-0102: J301D connector of hopper motor has poor contact 0017-3324 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description Since J301D connector of the yellow hopper motor (M39) had poor contact, the error code "E025-0102"...
Page 775: E025-0102: Connector Of Yellow Toner Supply Screw Hp Sensor (Ps68) Has Poor Contact
14.3.7.9 E025-0102: Connector of Yellow toner supply screw HP sensor (PS68) has poor contact 0019-9593 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description Since the yellow toner supply screw HP sensor (PS68) had poor contact, the error code "E025-0102"...
Page 776: E198-1000: J3502 Connector On Color Sensor Driver Pcb Has Poor Contact
14.3.7.14 E202-0001/E202-0002/ Document exposure lamp's failure to light up occurs when mounting DADF-R1 0018-6306 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description After mounting the DADF-R1, either of the following symptoms occurred: document exposure lamp's failure in lighting up, E202-0001, or E202-0002.
Page 777: E733-0001 Sometimes Occurs During Printing
14.3.7.20 E747-0219 occurs in a certain mode (i.e., when selecting Image Repeat > Area Designation (or Flaming) > Copy Ratio) 0019-6690 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Case in the field ] Description Since the error code "E747-0219"...
Page 778: E000/E004: Drawer Connector Pin Of Fixing Heater Cable Unit Moves Back (Jp Model)
2. If the RB-A board is connected correctly, wipe its terminal with lint-free paper impregnated with alcohol, and then refit the board. 14.3.7.22 E000/E004: Drawer connector pin of Fixing Heater Cable Unit moves back (JP Model) 0015-6597 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the AC terminal of the fixing drawer connector (in the fixing assembly side) moved back, the connector failed to have secure contact with the connector in the main body side, causing the error code "E000"...
Page 779 Chapter 14 F-14-55 3. Cut the tie-wrap [2] binding the fixing heater cable. Note: When cutting the tie-wrap, cut only the head of the tie-wrap with a nipper while paying attention not to damage the cable. 4. After cutting the tie-wrap [2], pull the cable toward the metal plate (in the direction of the arrow) [5] by approx. 10mm, and then sleave the part [6] of the cable to release stress.
Page 780: E820-0003 Is Indicated: Primary Corona Assembly Is Mounted Incorrectly
14.3.7.24 E842-0009 occurs at last rotation performed during a continuous black-and-white job 0019-4405 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When running a copy job to print a black-and-white image on 60 sheets of 13x19-size plain paper, the message "Adjusting gradation.
Page 781: Specifications-Related Faq
The low-power mode time can be set in user mode > Timer Settings > Low-power Mode Time (default: 15 min). 14.3.8.1.3 Face-up delivery is not possible when printing 0017-3329 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Manual-related ] Description Although the face-up delivery is possible in copying, it cannot be selected when printing in the current specifications.
Page 782: How To Check Value Of Sensor (Ps63) On The Waste Toner Box
- For EFI controllers, this mode can be set from the printer driver. 14.3.8.1.5 How to check value of sensor (PS63) on the waste toner box 0017-8609 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 / imagePRESS C1 (CUSTOM) / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ [ Manual-related ] Description Along with the release of system software Ver.
Page 783: List Of Clutch / Solenoid
Chapter 14 Connector No. Number Side driver PCB Feeding driver PCB Back driver PCB Pickup driver PCB Fixing driver PCB DC controller PCB J3421/J3401 J1193 J1301/J1314 J1184 J1301/J1314 J1184 J1404/J1412 J1177 J1404/J1412 J1177 J1405/J1412 J1177 J1405/J1412 J1177 J3802/J3810 J1198 J3802/J3810 J1198 SL10 J1301/J1314...
Page 784: Motor
J1184 SL11 J3304/J3312 J1181 SL11 SL10 F-14-61 14.4.2 Motor 14.4.2.1 List of motor 0014-0421 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 1. Reader unit T-14-10 Number Parts Function Parts No. E code M501 Scanning motor Activation of No. 1, No. 2 mirror base...
Page 785 Chapter 14 T-14-11 Connector No. Number I/F PCB Reader controller PCB M501 J306/307 J203 M501 F-14-62 2. Printer unit T-14-12 Number Parts Function Parts No. PART-CHK E code Polygon motor Activation of laser scanner FK2-0018 MTR>1 E110 Drum / ITB motor Activation of photosensitive drum, photosensitive FK2-0564 MTR>2...
Page 786 Chapter 14 Number Parts Function Parts No. PART-CHK E code Cassette 2 lifter motor Activation of cassette 2 lifter FK2-0016 MTR>23 Cassette 3 lifter motor Activation of cassette 3 lifter FK2-0016 MTR>24 Cassette 4 lifter motor Activation of cassette 4 lifter FK2-0016 MTR>25 ITB cleaning brush roller drive motor...
Page 787 Chapter 14 Connector No. Number Feeding driver Side driver PCB Back driver PCB Pickup driver PCB Fixing driver PCB Decurler PCB DC controller PCB J1408/J1411 J1128 J1409/J1411 J1128 J1410/J1411 J1128 J1409/J1411 J1128 J1308/J1312 J1183 J3405/J3401 J1193 J3416/J3419 J1167 J3416/J3419 J1167 J1307/J1312 J1183 J1402/J1403...
Page 788: List Of Motor
Chapter 14 F-14-63 14.4.2.2 List of motor 0015-9872 Color Image Reader-H1 1. Reader unit T-14-14 Number Parts Function Parts No. E code M501 Scanning motor Activation of No. 1, No. 2 mirror base FK2-1182 E202 T-14-15 Connector No. Number I/F PCB Reader controller PCB M501 J306/307...
Page 789: List Of Motor
Chapter 14 M501 F-14-64 14.4.2.3 List of Motor 0020-5952 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. Reader unit T-14-16 Number Parts Function Parts No. E code M501 Scanning motor Activation of No. 1, No. 2 mirror base FK2-1182 E202 T-14-17 Connector No.
Page 790 Chapter 14 Number Parts Function Parts No. PART-CHK E code Pickup 3 / 4 motor Activation of pickup assemblies 3 and 4 FK2-0028 MTR>16 Secondary transfer roller detachment / Detaching / attaching secondary transfer outer FK2-0573 MTR>17 E077 attachment motor roller ITB cleaning brush roller detachment / Detaching / attaching ITB cleaning brush roller...
Page 791 Chapter 14 Connector No. Number Feeding driver Pickup driver DC controller Side driver PCB Back driver PCB Fixing driver PCB Decurler PCB J1308/J1312 J1183 J3405/J3401 J1193 J3416/J3419 J1167 J3416/J3419 J1167 J1307/J1312 J1183 J1402/J1403 J1178 J1402/J1403 J1178 J1419/J1403 J1178 J1419/J1403 J1178 J3405/J3401 J1193 J3411/J3402...
Page 792: List Of Fan
Chapter 14 F-14-66 14.4.3 Fan 14.4.3.1 List of fan 0014-1278 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / Color Image Reader-H1 1. Reader unit T-14-20 Connector No. Number Parts Function Parts No. Interface PCB Reader cooling fan 2 Cooling of reader assembly...
Page 793 Chapter 14 F-14-67 2. Printer unit T-14-21 E code / Alarm Number Parts Function Parts No. PART-CHK code Primary charging suction fan Suction from outside of machine to primary FK2-0103 FAN-ON>1 E824-0000 charging assembly Primary exhaust fan Discharging from primary charging assembly FK2-0537 FAN-ON>2 E824-0001...
Page 794 Chapter 14 T-14-22 Connector No. Number Main Side driver Feeding driver Back driver Pickup driver Fixing driver DC controller Relay PCB Decurler PCB controller J3417/J3419 J1167 J3807/J3810 J1198 J1302/J1314 J1184 J1302/J1314 J1184 J3811 J1197 J1301/J1314 J1184 J3404/J3401 J1193 J1007 J301 J4023/J4004 J1138 FM10...
Page 795: List Of Fan
Chapter 14 FM10 FM18 FM16 FM23 FM17 FM19 FM11 FM12 FM13 FM15 FM14 FM22 FM20 FM27 FM26 FM25 F-14-68 14.4.3.2 List of Fan 0020-6832 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. Reader unit T-14-23 Connector No. Number Parts Function Parts No. Interface PCB Reader cooling fan 2 Cooling of reader assembly...
Page 796 Chapter 14 T-14-24 E code / Alarm Number Parts Function Parts No. PART-CHK code Primary charging suction fan Suction from outside of machine to primary FK2-0103 FAN-ON>1 E824-0000 charging assembly Primary exhaust fan Discharging from primary charging assembly FK2-0537 FAN-ON>2 E824-0001 Feeding fan 1 Absorption of paper to feeder belt...
Page 797: Sensor
FM14 FM22 FM20 FM27 FM26 FM28 FM25 FM29 F-14-70 14.4.4 Sensor 14.4.4.1 List of sensor 0014-1156 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 1. Reader unit T-14-26 Connector No. Number Parts Function Parts No. I/O (RCON) Reader controller Interface PCB PS501...
Page 798 Chapter 14 PS501 PS502 F-14-71 2. Printer unit T-14-27 Numbe Parts Function Part No. E code JAM code ITOP-A sensor ITB home position detection A FK2-0161 P002-10 0 : HP E070 ITOP-B sensor ITB home position detection B FK2-0161 P002-09 0 : HP E070 Patch detection sensor...
Page 799 Chapter 14 Numbe Parts Function Part No. E code JAM code PS23 Secondary transfer detachment / Secondary transfer detachment / FK2-0149 attachment HP sensor attachment HP detection PS24 ITB cleaning brush roller HP sensor Detection of ITB cleaner home FK2-0149 P002-07 1 : HP / flag position...
Page 800 Chapter 14 Numbe Parts Function Part No. E code JAM code PS54 Vertical path 2 sensor Detection of pickup vertical path 2 FK2-0149 P015-07 1 : Paper xx07 present PS55 Vertical path 3 sensor Detection of pickup vertical path 3 FK2-0149 P015-08 1 : Paper...
Page 801 Chapter 14 T-14-28 Connector No. Number Feeding driver Pickup driver DC controller Side driver PCB Back driver PCB Fixing driver PCB Decurler PCB J3403/J3401 J1193 J3403/J3401 J1193 J3415/J3414 J1192 J3415/J3414 J1192 PS5a J1305/J1314 J1184 PS5b J1305/J1314 J1184 PS6a J1305/J1314 J1184 PS6b J1305/J1314 J1184...
Page 802 Chapter 14 Connector No. Number Feeding driver Pickup driver DC controller Side driver PCB Back driver PCB Fixing driver PCB Decurler PCB PS46 J1418/J1403 J1178 PS47 J1405/J1412 J1177 PS48 J1405/J1412 J1177 PS49 J1405/J1412 J1177 PS50 J1405/J1412 J1177 PS51 J1418/J1403 J1178 PS52 J1418/J1403 J1178...
Page 803: List Of Sensor
Chapter 14 PS29 PS31 PS28 PS30 PS53 PS35 PS37 PS34 PS36 PS54 PS42 PS44 PS41 PS43 PS55 PS48 PS50 PS26 PS47 PS82 PS49 PS56 PS21 PS74 PS6a PS10 PS65 PS71 PS5a PS6b PS78 PS70 PS69 PS13 PS17 PS5b PS77 PS25 PS100 PS20 PS12...
Page 804: List Of Sensor
Chapter 14 T-14-29 Connector No. Number Parts Function Parts No. I/O (RCON) Reader controller Interface PCB PS501 ADF open / closed sensor Detection of ADF open / FK2-0149 P006-7 0:Close J322/308 J202 closed PS502 Scanner HP sensor Detection of scanner home FK2-0149 P006-5 0:HP...
Page 805 Chapter 14 T-14-31 Number Parts Function Part No. E code JAM code ITOP-A sensor ITB home position detection A FK2-0161 P002-10 0 : HP E070 ITOP-B sensor ITB home position detection B FK2-0161 P002-09 0 : HP E070 Patch detection sensor FK2-0588 Patch detection sensor FK2-0588...
Page 806 Chapter 14 Number Parts Function Part No. E code JAM code PS47 Cassette 4 pickup sensor Detection of cassette 4 pickup FK2-0149 P015-03 1 : Paper present xx04 PS48 Cassette 4 limit sensor Detection of cassette 4 limit FK2-0149 P012-12 1 : At limit PS49 Cassette 4 paper detecting sensor...
Page 807 Chapter 14 Connector No. Number Feeding driver Pickup driver DC controller Side driver PCB Back driver PCB Fixing driver PCB Decurler PCB PS11 J3306/J3312 J1181 PS12 J1305/J1314 J1184 PS13 J1302/J1314 J1184 PS14 J3301/3312 J1181 PS15 J3306/J3312 J1181 PS17 J1302/J1314 J1184 PS18 J1302/J1314 J1184...
Page 808 Chapter 14 Connector No. Number Feeding driver Pickup driver DC controller Side driver PCB Back driver PCB Fixing driver PCB Decurler PCB PS78 J4205/J4204 J1164 PS79 J4205/J4204 J1164 PS80 J4205/J4204 J1164 PS82 J3416/J3419 J1167 PS100 J4205/J4204 J1164 14-73...
Page 809: Switch
PS15 PS27 PS76 PS58 PS63 PS32 PS33 PS38 PS39 PS45 PS46 PS51 PS52 F-14-75 14.4.5 Switch 14.4.5.1 List of switch 0014-0910 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 1. Reader unit The reader unit has no switch. 2. Printer unit 14-74...
Page 810 Chapter 14 T-14-33 COPIER> Number Parts Function Parts No. E code FUNCTION Main switch Main power ON / OFF FK2-2509 Manual feed door open / closed switch Detection of manual feed tray open / WC4-5231 closed Front door switch Detection of front cover open / closed WC4-5125 P013-15 1 : Open...
Page 811: List Of Switch
Chapter 14 SW10 SW15 SW16 SW13 SW14 F-14-76 14.4.5.2 List of switch 0015-9875 Color Image Reader-H1 1. Reader unit The reader unit has no switch. 14.4.5.3 List of Switch 0020-5954 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. Reader unit The reader unit has no switch. 2.
Page 812 Chapter 14 COPIER > Number Parts Function Parts No. E code FUNCTION SW10 Bk toner retainer detection switch Detection of absence / presence of Bk WC4-5263 P006-03 1 : Set toner retainer SW11 L toner retainer detection switch Detection of absence / presence of Bk WC4-5263 P006-04 1 : Set...
Page 813: Lamps, Heaters, And Others
SW10 SW15 SW11 SW16 SW13 SW14 F-14-77 14.4.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others 14.4.6.1 List of lamp / heater/ others 0014-0912 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 1. Reader unit T-14-37 Number Parts Function Parts No. PART-CHK E code H501 Lens heater...
Page 814 Chapter 14 H501 H502 F-14-78 2. Printer unit T-14-38 Number Parts Function Parts No. PART-CHK E code H1/H2 Fixing main heater / Fixing Temperature control of fixing roller FK2-0551 (100V) E000, E001, E002, E003, sub heater (main) / Temperature control of fixing E004 FK2-0552 (120V) roller...
Page 815: List Of Lamp / Heater/ Others
Chapter 14 Connector No. Number Main controller PCB AC driver PCB DC controller PCB Side driver PCB LED1 J1167 J3416/J3419 LED2 J1167 J3416/J3419 ELCB1 J1801 HDD1 J1013/J1014 J301 LED1 LED2 HDD1 ELCB1 F-14-79 14.4.6.2 List of lamp / heater/ others 0015-9876 Color Image Reader-H1 1.
Page 816: List Of Lamp / Heater/ Others
Chapter 14 14.4.6.3 List of Lamp / Heater/ Others 0020-5956 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. Reader unit T-14-41 Number Connector No. Parts Function Parts No. PART-CHK E code Interface PCB Reader controller H501 Lens heater Anti-condensation for FK2- lens 0226(100V) FK2-...
Page 817: Pcbs
J1013/J1014 J301 LED1 LED2 HDD1 ELCB1 F-14-82 14.4.7 PCBs 14.4.7.1 List of PCB 0014-0913 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 1. Reader unit T-14-44 Number Parts Parts No. Function Interface PCB FM2-4662 Interface between printer and ADF Reader controller PCB...
Page 818 Chapter 14 F-14-83 2. Printer unit T-14-45 Number Parts Parts No. Function DC controller PCB FM2-8161 Controlling printer assembly / accessory Fixing driver PCB FM2-7729 Controlling sensor, motor, fan, solenoid of fixing assembly Pickup driver PCB FM2-7726 Controlling motor of pickup assembly Cassette 1 size sensor FM2-0849 Detection of paper size of cassette 1...
Page 819 Chapter 14 Number Parts Parts No. Function [29] Potential control PCB FM2-2642 Conversion of output of potential sensor [30] Potential sensor PCB Measurement of potential on the surface of photosensitive drum [31] DC power supply relay PCB FM2-7739 Controlling ON / OFF of DC power, protection of overvoltage / overcurrent [32] DC / DC PCB...
Page 820: List Of Pcb
Chapter 14 [49] [51] [50] [52] [14] [20] [17] [11] [10] [13] [21] [24] [29] [22] [16] [23] [18] [19] [25] [46] [30] [47] [12] [26] [26] [26] [26] [36] [38] [37] [40] [45] [15] [43] [39] [33] [41] [32] [42] [35] [34]...
Page 821: List Of Pcb
Chapter 14 F-14-85 14.4.7.3 List of PCB 0020-5957 imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. Reader unit T-14-47 Number Parts Parts No. Function Interface PCB FM2-4662 Interface between printer and ADF Reader controller PCB FM2-3932 Controlling reader assembly CCD / AP PCB FM2-3920 (CCD unit) Analogue image processing Inverter PCB...
Page 822 Chapter 14 Number Parts Parts No. Function [22] HV6-1 PCB FM2-7202 ITB cleaning bias control [23] HV6-2 PCB FM2-7192 ITB cleaning bias control [24] HV8 PCB FM2-7193 Secondary transfer outer roller cleaning bias control [25] HV9 PCB FM2-7194 Tension roller bias control [26] HV10 PCB FM2-7195...
Page 823: Connectors
Chapter 14 [50] [52] [51] [53] F-14-87 14.4.8 Connectors 14.4.8.1 List of connector 0014-6157 imagePRESS C1 14-88...
Page 824 Chapter 14 Reader J302 J309 J322 J301 J209 J210 J323 J208 J5102 J207 J201 J5100 J5101 J505 J306 J202 J203 J308 J101 J307 J102 J303 J204 J205 J312 J305 J321 J206 J1302 F-14-88 14-89...
Page 825 Chapter 14 J9003 J9001 J1186 J1036 J1185 J465 J1804 J1803 J1812 J1813 J1802 J752 J755 J465 J813 J3310 J753 J750 J754 J751 J830 J805 J804 J801 J829 J806 J3302 J809 J838 J3303 J3304 J807 J3314 J835 J826 J827 J825 J814 J820 J821 J810...
Page 826 Chapter 14 J724 J712 J720 J706 J709 J717 J726 J743 J713 J704 J715 J714 J721 J1307 J719 J727 J705 J1302 J1303 J707 J1301 J725 J703 J711 J710 J702 J701 F-14-90 14-91...
Page 827 Chapter 14 J1009 J1016 J1008 J737 J736 J1010 J742 J1011 J733 J730 J1012 J729 J1013 J733 J731 J734 J1001 J732 J1034 J1002 J1003 J1306 J1007 J741 J1305 J1304 J1308 J738 J740 J1309 J739 J1310 J1311 F-14-91 14-92...
Page 828 Chapter 14 J1183 J1184 J1182 J1181 J3350 J474 J3351 J3352 J494 J3101 J3353 J445 J445 J3103 J204 J202 J401 J35010 J203 J3104 J472 J3506 J3100 J442 J201 J3102 J3502 J1702 J3505 J3503 J1313 J441 J3504 J812 J1312 J841 J1314 J3312 J3313 J4015 J4016...
Page 829 Chapter 14 J1168 J203 J204 J3802 J208 J203 J209 J201 J206 J551 J406 J115 F-14-93 14-94...
Page 830 Chapter 14 J383 J308 J433 J3418 J307 J305 J440 J3411 J388 J385 J3421 J335 J382 J306 J386 J303 J301 J304 J490 J4099 J467 J334 J387 J384 J302 J4005 J334 J4014 J332 J34D J447 J331 J449 J468 J1811 J476 J24D J29D F-14-94 14-95...
Page 831 Chapter 14 J1120 J1122 J1165 J1170 J4500 J353 J3412 J1171 J1164 J434 J351 J3503 J3502 J320 J316 J1191 J3501 J312 J314 J3500 J337 J1199 J315 J476 J339 J468 J310 J456 J319 J313 J4201 J338 J473 J336 J318 J317 J4202 J4204 J477 J309 J4035...
Page 832 Chapter 14 J3419 J1166 J3420 J1193 J3402 J1167 J3414 J1192 J3401 J1195 J3404 J3403 J255 J3405 J254 J251 J256 J241 J253 J259 J258 J257 F-14-96 14-97...
Page 833 Chapter 14 J1188 J1189 J201 J202 J101 J450 J451 J471 J36 J30 J4001 J660 J7300 J300 J3600 J206 J207 J205 J204 J102 J3150 J3151 J203 J3051 J3050 J3251 J3250 J3400 J3401 J660 J300 J7300 J3600 F-14-97 14-98...
Page 834 Chapter 14 J420 J3417 J432 J3415 J421 J425 J3410 J423 J3416 J427 J433 J426 J422 J425 J431 J430 J429 J454 F-14-98 14-99...
Page 835 Chapter 14 J3422 J372 J373 J374 J376 J488 J402 J481 J371 J377 J403 J470 J1169 J1173 J482 J478 J1180 J375 J489 J3807 J480 J4022 J4001 J4008 F-14-99 14-100...
Page 836 Chapter 14 J520D J524 J521 J525 J549 J522 J523 J521D J1190 J530 J527 J1177 J531 J1128 J526 J528 J529 J1113 J552 J536D J520D J566 J547 J455 J521D J544 J1810 J556 J1819 J548 J1821 J536D J550 J1818 J555 J1820 J1411 J535D J551 J543 J1823...
Page 837 Chapter 14 J2107 J2124 J2508 J2507 J2111 J2121 J2120 J791 J1021 J1020 J1019 J2119 J1016 J2113 J1017 J1178 J512 J511 J501 J2125 J505 J513 J1401 J506 J514 J502 J507 J1403 J515 J516 J503 J508 J1418 J1419 J1402 J517 J518 J504 F-14-101 14-102...
Page 838 Chapter 14 J3202 J3413 J484 J2011 J486 J485 J3801 J4001 J34M J1414 J4002 J419 J4007 J4009 J1415 J4012 J4013 J4010 J483 F-14-102 14-103...
Page 839 Chapter 14 J452 J3201 J3211 J3702 J1087 J453 J4510D J1176 J1197 J1198 J3805 J1501 J3810 J1502 J3811 J414 J415 J3806 J1511 J1515 J3303 J455 J1821 J1810 J1811 J1819 J4008 J1818 J681 J1820 J1816 J1817 J1823 J1822 F-14-103 14-104...
Page 840 Chapter 14 J443 J411 J416 J3809 J3803 J407 J410 J412 J418 J444 J446 J3804 J487 J448 J134 J417 J143 J141 J140 J142 J150 J4022 J4023 J4021 J4020 J4019 J4018 J4017 F-14-104 14-105...
Page 841 Chapter 14 J1179 J1138 J462 J1152 J1172 J461 J459 J1101 J458 J464 J1174 J463 J457 J565 J492 J564 J561 J250 J562 J563 J1408 J1409 J1410 J4004 J4008 F-14-105 14-106...
Page 842: List Of Connector
Chapter 14 J301 J1014 J1018 J2110 J5003 J5002 J2122 J2121 J1037 J113 J252 J115 J1807 J1805 J1806 J4101 J4011 J1801 F-14-106 14.4.8.2 List of Connector 0020-5958 imagePRESS C1+ 14-107...
Page 843 Chapter 14 Reader J302 J309 J322 J301 J209 J210 J323 J208 J5102 J207 J201 J5100 J5101 J505 J306 J202 J203 J308 J101 J307 J102 J303 J204 J205 J312 J305 J321 J206 J1302 F-14-107 14-108...
Page 844 Chapter 14 J9003 J9001 J1186 J1036 J1185 J465 J1804 J1803 J1812 J1813 J1802 J752 J755 J465 J813 J3310 J753 J750 J754 J751 J830 J805 J804 J801 J829 J806 J3302 J809 J838 J3303 J3304 J807 J3314 J835 J826 J827 J825 J814 J820 J821 J810...
Page 845 Chapter 14 J724 J712 J720 J706 J709 J717 J726 J743 J713 J704 J715 J714 J721 J1307 J719 J727 J705 J1302 J1303 J707 J1301 J725 J703 J711 J710 J702 J701 F-14-109 14-110...
Page 846 Chapter 14 J1009 J1016 J1008 J737 J736 J1010 J742 J1011 J733 J730 J1012 J729 J1013 J733 J731 J734 J1001 J732 J1034 J1002 J1003 J1306 J1007 J741 J1305 J1304 J1308 J738 J740 J1309 J739 J1310 J1311 F-14-110 14-111...
Page 847 Chapter 14 J1183 J1184 J1182 J1181 J3350 J474 J3351 J3352 J494 J3101 J3353 J445 J445 J3103 J204 J202 J401 J35010 J203 J3104 J472 J3506 J3100 J442 J201 J3102 J3502 J1702 J3505 J3503 J1313 J441 J3504 J812 J1312 J841 J1314 J3312 J3313 J4015 J4016...
Page 848 Chapter 14 J1168 J203 J204 J3802 J208 J203 J209 J201 J206 J551 J406 J115 F-14-112 14-113...
Page 849 Chapter 14 J383 J308 J433 J3418 J307 J305 J440 J3411 J388 J385 J3421 J335 J382 J306 J386 J303 J301 J304 J490 J4099 J467 J334 J387 J384 J302 J4005 J334 J4014 J332 J34D J447 J331 J449 J468 J1811 J476 J24D J29D F-14-113 14-114...
Page 850 Chapter 14 J1120 J1122 J1165 J1170 J4500 J353 J3412 J1171 J1164 J434 J351 J3503 J3502 J320 J316 J1191 J3501 J312 J314 J3500 J337 J1199 J315 J476 J339 J468 J310 J456 J319 J313 J4201 J338 J473 J336 J318 J317 J4202 J4204 J477 J309 J4035...
Page 851 Chapter 14 J3419 J1166 J3420 J1193 J3402 J1167 J3414 J1192 J3401 J1195 J3404 J3403 J255 J3405 J254 J251 J256 J241 J253 J259 J258 J257 F-14-115 14-116...
Page 852 Chapter 14 J1188 J1189 J201 J202 J101 J450 J451 J471 J36 J30 J4001 J660 J7300 J300 J3600 J206 J207 J205 J204 J102 J3150 J3151 J203 J3051 J3050 J3251 J3250 J3400 J3401 J660 J300 J7300 J3600 F-14-116 14-117...
Page 853 Chapter 14 J420 J3417 J432 J3415 J421 J425 J3410 J423 J3416 J427 J433 J426 J422 J425 J431 J430 J429 J454 F-14-117 14-118...
Page 854 Chapter 14 J3422 J372 J373 J374 J376 J488 J402 J481 J371 J377 J403 J470 J1169 J1173 J482 J478 J1180 J375 J489 J3807 J480 J4022 J4001 J4008 F-14-118 14-119...
Page 855 Chapter 14 J520D J524 J521 J525 J549 J522 J523 J521D J1190 J530 J527 J1177 J531 J1128 J526 J528 J529 J1113 J552 J536D J520D J566 J547 J455 J521D J544 J1810 J556 J1819 J548 J1821 J536D J550 J1818 J555 J1820 J1411 J535D J551 J543 J1823...
Page 856 Chapter 14 J2107 J2124 J2508 J2507 J2111 J2121 J2120 J791 J1021 J1020 J1019 J2119 J1016 J2113 J1017 J1178 J512 J511 J501 J2125 J505 J513 J1401 J506 J514 J502 J507 J1403 J515 J516 J503 J508 J1418 J1419 J1402 J517 J518 J504 F-14-120 14-121...
Page 857 Chapter 14 J3202 J3413 J484 J2011 J486 J485 J3801 J4001 J34M J1414 J4002 J419 J4007 J4009 J1415 J4012 J4013 J4010 J483 F-14-121 14-122...
Page 858 Chapter 14 J452 J3201 J3211 J3702 J1087 J453 J4510D J1176 J1197 J1198 J3805 J1501 J3810 J1502 J3811 J414 J415 J3806 J1511 J1515 J3303 J455 J1821 J1810 J1811 J1819 J4008 J1818 J681 J1820 J1816 J1817 J1823 J1822 F-14-122 14-123...
Page 859 Chapter 14 J443 J411 J416 J3809 J3803 J407 J410 J412 J418 J444 J446 J3804 J487 J448 J134 J417 J143 J141 J140 J142 J150 J4022 J4023 J4021 J4020 J4019 J4018 J4017 F-14-123 14-124...
Page 860 Chapter 14 J1179 J1138 J462 J1152 J1172 J461 J459 J1101 J458 J464 J1174 J463 J457 J565 J492 J564 J561 J250 J562 J563 J1408 J1409 J1410 J4004 J4008 F-14-124 14-125...
Page 861 Chapter 14 J301 J1014 J1018 J2110 J5003 J5002 J2122 J2121 J1037 J113 J252 J115 J1807 J1805 J1806 J4101 J4011 J1801 F-14-125 14-126...
Page 862 Chapter 15 Self Diagnosis...
Page 863 Contents Contents 15.1 Error Code Table................................15-1 15.1.1 Error Code Table..................................15-1 15.2 Error Code Details ..............................15-3 15.2.1 List of Error Codes................................... 15-3 15.2.2 E602 （HDD/Encryption board error）detail........................15-19 15.3 Error Codes (SEND) ..............................15-23 15.3.1 End Code Items..................................15-23 15.4 Jam Codes ................................15-24 15.4.1 Jam Code (Printer Unit) .................................
Page 864: Error Code Table
0012-0883 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The machine is equipped with a self diagnostic mechanism which runs a check on the machine (particularly, on sensor output) at such times as programmed in advance, indicating the nature of any error it may have come across on control panel.
Page 865 Chapter 15 Code Error Name/Description E5F2 Error in saddle guide (saddle finisher) E5F3 Error in saddle alignment (saddle finisher) E5F4 Error in saddle rear stapling (saddle finisher) E5F5 Error in saddle front stapling (saddle finisher) E5F6 Error in saddle butting (saddle finisher) E5F8 Error in saddle connector (saddle finisher) E5F9...
Page 866: Error Code Details
Chapter 15 15.2 Error Code Details 15.2.1 List of Error Codes 0012-0886 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-15-2 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E000 At power on, the rise in the temperature of the fixing assembly is not high enough.
Page 867 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E004 Error in protection circuit of fixing assembly Open circuit/poor contact of main thermistor (THM1, THM3, THM5) or sub thermistor (THM4, THM5, THM6), fault of AC driver PCB or DC controller, open circuit/poor contact of heater. 0101 Detecting open circuit of the film side of the fixing main Turn off and then on the main power thermistor...
Page 868 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E012 There is an error in the drum ITB motor 0001 After motor start-up, a lock state is not identified for 1 sec or more. Check the photosensitive drum, the ITB area and drum/ITB motor; and then, turn off and then on the main power.
Page 869 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E020 Error in ATR The last 2-digit of the detailed code indicates color. xx=01:Y, xx=02:M, xx=03: C, xx=04:K, xx=05: L (imagePRESS C1+ only) xx81 The detected value of the patch image read sensor's base (drum Turn off and then on the main power.
Page 870 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E025 Error in motor of supplying system xx=01:Y, xx=02:M, xx=03: C, xx=04:K, xx=05: L (imagePRESS C1+ only) xx01 Error in cartridge motor After shaking the corresponding toner retainer well, attach to the xx=01:Y, xx=02:M, xx=03: C, xx=04:K host machine.
Page 871 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E078 Error in failure of detecting HP (pressure) of cleaner unit of transfer belt 0001 The HP sensor does not go on within 5 sec after the start of a HP Check the shift motor of the brush roller. Check the HP of the search.
Page 872 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E227 There is a power supply (24 V) error. 0001 At power-on, the 24 V port is off. Check the power supply harness connector for connection Replace the power supply. 0002 At the start of a job, the 24 V port is off. Check the power supply harness connector for connection Replace the power supply.
Page 873 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E531 There is an error in stapling (finisher/saddle finisher) 0001 The home position sensor does not go off within a specific period 1) Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the of time after the stapler motor has started to rotate.
Page 874 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E540 There is an error in up and down movement of the upper tray (finisher/saddle finisher). 8001 There is a clock error in up/down motor of the upper tray. 1)Check the No. 1 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2)Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the No.
Page 875 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E542 There is an error in up and down movement of the lower tray (finisher/saddle finisher). 8001 There is a clock error in up/down motor of the lower tray. 1)Check the No. 2 tray area sensors 1 through 3. Are the sensors normal? 2)Check the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the No.
Page 876 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E592 There is an error in the punch horizontal registration sensor (punch unit). 8001 There is an error in the light-receiving voltage at time of light Turn off and then on the main power. emission (rear edge sensor).
Page 877 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E5F6 There is an error in saddle butting (saddle finisher). 8001 The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn on Check the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)/the paper pushing when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or plate home position sensor (PI14S).
Page 878 If the machine fails to reset, re-install the system software of the external controller. 0010 A controller for a non-Canon machine is connected. Turn off the main power, and check the controller is an appropriate type, and check the cable; then turn on the main power.
Page 879 0002 At time of start-up, the MAC address is found to be illegal. Turn off the main power, and replace the Main Controller A non-Canon Mac address is detected. PCB(SUB LANBAR-A); then turn on the main power. 0003 At time of start-up, PHY ID is found to be illegal.
Page 880 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E748 CL2 board-dependent, board error 4000 A packet timeout condition has occurred in the G-Chip loopback. 1. Disconnect and then connect 4 to 5 G-chip boards several times. 2. Replace the G-chip board. 3.
Page 881 Chapter 15 Code Cause (Detection Description) Remedy E805 Error in cooling fan of fixing belt 000E The edge/rear side cooling fan of fixing belt is unlocked Turn off the main power, check power supply to the fan/replace fan, and then, turn on the main power. 000F The center/rear side cooling fan of fixing belt is unlocked Turn off the main power, check power supply to the fan/replace fan, and then, turn on the main power.
Page 882: E602 （Hdd/Encryption Board Error）Detail
(hard port monitoring) 15.2.2 E602 (HDD/Encryption board error) detail 0019-4907 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ <E602-XXYY> In case of XX=[00] 15-19...
Page 883 Chapter 15 T-15-3 Description Measures If cannot recognize HDD 1. Turn OFF the power and check the connection of HDD cable. After that, turn ON the power. If cannot find the start partition 2. When turning ON the power, put an ear onto HDD or touch HDD to check whether the inner disk is rotating or (BOOTDEV) at start-up not.
Page 884 Chapter 15 T-15-5 Description Measures 1. Specify the corresponding partition number to CHK-TYPE and after executing HD-CHECK, turn OFF/ON the power. 2. Specify the corresponding partition number to CHK-TYPE and after executing HD-CLEAR, turn OFF/ON the power. 1. Ask user to download the address book data via remote UI. 2.
Page 885 Chapter 15 <E602-XXYY> In case of XX=[20] T-15-6 Description Measures Authentication error between the host 1. Remove/insert the encryption board and turn OFF/ON the power. machine and the encryption board 2. After clearing the encryption key (*), execute HDD format and reinstallation of system via SST. If cannot recognize the encryption board 1.
Page 886: Error Codes (Send)
Chapter 15 15.3 Error Codes (SEND) 15.3.1 End Code Items 0012-0888 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 T-15-7 Cause Remedy # 001 Indicates that different sizes of originals were scanned while media size is not set Check the original and the settings, and then repeat the operation.
Page 887: Jam Codes
Indicates that the job was cancelled due to security error. Contact the system administrator. 15.4 Jam Codes 15.4.1 Jam Code (Printer Unit) 0012-4835 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 1. Type of Jam T-15-8 Code Type of Jam...
Page 888: Jam Code (Finisher-Related)
0D93 Wrong material specification (OHP sheet is fed in the plain paper setting) PS5, PS6 15.4.2 Jam Code (Finisher-Related) 0012-4838 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-15-10 Code Type of Jam Sensor No.
Page 889: Jam Code (Adf-Related)
When opening of the front door is detected while the Saddle unit is in operation. 15.4.3 Jam Code (ADF-Related) 0012-4839 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-15-11 Code Type of Jam Sensor No.
Page 890 Chapter 15 Code Type of Jam Sensor No. Details 0007 Delivery delay PI13 When the delivery sensor fails to detect a document after it is fed by a specified amount (631mm - length of document) after the startup of the belt motor during the delivery operation. 0008 Delivery stationary 1 PI13,S9...
Page 891 Chapter 15 Code Type of Jam Sensor No. Details 0049 1st sheet delivery stationary PI13,S9 When delivery stationary 2 (0009) occurs on the 1st sheet. 0050 1st sheet pre-reverse delay 1 S3 When pre-reverse delay 1 (0010) occurs on the 1st sheet. 0051 1st sheet pre-reverse delay 2 S1,S3 When pre-reverse delay 2 (0011) occurs on the 1st sheet.
Page 892: Alarm Codes
When supply voltage from the main unit is lowered while the machine is in operation. 15.5 Alarm Codes 15.5.1 Alarm Code 0014-0594 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-15-12 Block Code Detailed Code...
Page 893 Chapter 15 Block Code Detailed Code 73 LIPS 0004 Indicates the overflow of the work memory for translation 0006 Indicates the configuration acquisition / management error 0007 Indicates the memory management error (Inside LIPS) 0008 Indicates the file management error (Inside LIPS) 0009 Indicates the reception data management error 0010...
Page 894 Chapter 16 Service Mode...
Page 896 Contents Contents 16.1 Outline..................................16-1 16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode ..............................16-1 16.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ............................16-2 16.1.3 Exiting service modes ................................16-2 16.1.4 Back-Up ....................................16-2 16.1.5 Initial screen..................................... 16-3 16.1.6 Main/intermediate Item Screen..............................16-3 16.1.7 Sub- Item Screen..................................16-4 16.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)..........................16-5 16.2.1 COPIER ....................................
Page 897 Contents 16.7 TEST (Test Print Mode)............................16-291 16.7.1 COPIER ....................................16-291 16.7.1.1 COPIER List ......................................16-291 16.7.1.2 COPIER List ......................................16-293 16.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ..........................16-295 16.8.1 COPIER ....................................16-295 16.8.1.1 COPIER List ......................................16-295 16.8.1.2 COPIER List ......................................16-305 16.8.1.3 COPIER List ......................................
Page 898: Outline
16.1.1 Construction of Service Mode 0011-9614 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The Service Mode screen is divided into three layers; initial screen, large/middle items, and small items, as shown below. Each screen provides a mode used for regular maintenance (Level 1 mode) and a mode used for troubleshooting (Level 2 mode).
Page 899: Entering Or Selecting Service Modes
0011-9615 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ When you make the machine operate via the Service Mode, be sure to remove a cable from an external controller or a network cable before the machine enters the Service Mode.
Page 900: Initial Screen
Chapter 16 F-16-4 Copier model F-16-5 16.1.5 Initial screen 0011-9621 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ COPIER Initial item FEEDER Touch to select an item. SORTER BOARD F-16-6 16.1.6 Main/intermediate Item Screen 0011-9624...
Page 901: Sub- Item Screen
Intermediate items CST-STS Touch an item to select it. F-16-7 16.1.7 Sub- Item Screen 0011-9626 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ Number of pages Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter <VERSION> < 1/3 >...
Page 902: Display (Status Display Mode)
Chapter 16 16.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) 16.2.1 COPIER 16.2.1.1 COPIER List 0011-9631 imagePRESS C1 1.VERSION T-16-1 COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading Contents Level Use it to indicate the ROM version of various PCBs (copier, accessories). - The format of display is as follows: if R-CON XX.YY>, XX: version; YY: R&D control number. - If no PCB is installed, the display will be as follows: <-:->.
Page 903 Chapter 16 COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading Contents Level WEBDAV Version of the "WebDAV" file TIMESTMP Version of the "Time Stamp" file LANG-CS Version of the Czechoslovakian language file LANG-DA Version of the Danish language file LANG-EL Version of the Greek language file LANG-ES Version of the Spanish language file LANG-ET...
Page 904 Chapter 16 COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading Contents Level MEDIA-KO Version of the Korean paper brand information MEDIA-NL Version of the Dutch paper brand information MEDIA-NO Version of the Norwegian paper brand information MEDIA-PL Version of the Polish paper brand information MEDIA-PT Version of the Portuguese paper brand information MEDIA-RU Version of the Russian paper brand information MEDIA-SL...
Page 905 Chapter 16 COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS Subheading Contents Level PDL-FNC1 Display the available PDL. (1) b31: BDL b30: PS b29: PCL b28: PDL b27: LIPS b26: N201 b25: I5577 b24: ESC/P b23: HPGL b22: HPGL2 b21: IMAGING b20: KS b19 - 16: Reserve (This is going to be used when a PDL is newly added.) PDL-FNC2 Display the available PDL.
Page 906 Chapter 16 5.JAM F-16-10 Touch any Jam Indication screen to go to the detailed screen of that particular type of jam. [1] press to go to the previous page. [2] press to go to the next page. [3] indicates the order of occurrence of the jam in question. [4] indicates the type of jam.
Page 907 Chapter 16 Cord Location/classification feeder finisher - <CODE> Use it to indicate jam codes (Refer to Jam code list described later). - <P> Use it to indicate the source of paper. T-16-6 Code Description unable to specify cassette 1 cassette 2 cassette 3 cassette 4 not used...
Page 908 Chapter 16 Sensor Code Sensor type Remarks number xx14 side paper deck feed sensor PS106 xx15 fixing inlet sensor PS11 detects a residual jam only xx16 left deck stationary sensor PS47 detects a residual jam only 0D90 transparency sensor (front, rear) PS3, PS29 when the mode is transparency mode 0D91...
Page 909 Chapter 16 Code Sensor type Sensor notation Description 0042 post-separation sensor 1st; stationary jam at the post-separation sensor 0043 registration sensor 1st; not reaching the registration sensor 0044 registration sensor 1st; stationary at the registration sensor 0045 feed sensor 1st; not reaching the read sensor 0046 feed sensor 1st;...
Page 910 Chapter 16 COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS Subheading Contents Level PRE-TR Current level of the pre-transfer charging assembly (Unit: µA) BIAS DC value of each color developing bias (Unit: V) 1TR-CMOF Offset for adjustment of the primary transfer DC current monitor Setting range: -999 to 999(mv) 1TR-VMOF Offset for adjustment of the primary transfer DC voltage monitor Setting range:-999 to 999(mv)
Page 911 Chapter 16 COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT Subheading Contents Level VCONT-Y/M/C/K Current value of the electric potential for the target contrast (Y/M/C/K color) (Unit: V) VBACK-Y/M/C/K Current value of the electric potential for eliminating fogging (Y/M/C/K color) (Unit: V) 2TR-PPR Last output value of the paper voltage for the secondary transfer DC voltage 2TR-BASE Last output value of the standard voltage for the secondary transfer DC voltage 1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K...
Page 912 Chapter 16 11.MISC T-16-16 COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC Subheading Contents Level ENV-TR Environmental area Display the environmental area for transfer control based on the environment (temperature, humidity) in the printer. Setting value 1: Low humidity (5.8g or less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9g to 17.3g) 3: High humidity (17.4g or more) PP-S-REF REF value of the paper thickness detection sensor...
Page 913 Chapter 16 T-16-19 Location code Alarm code 02 scanner indicates the presence of dirt on the glass for stream reading. 0002 line correction alarm (upon detection of dust on the stream reading glass between originals) 0020 04 pickup/feed 0001 cassette 1 lifter error 0002 cassette 2 lifter error 0003...
Page 914 Chapter 16 T-16-21 COPIER<DISPLAY<HT-C Subheading Contents Level TGT-A-Y Target value in each pattern of ARCDAT (Y in Screen A) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 TGT-A-M Target value in each pattern of ARCDAT (M in Screen A) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 TGT-A-C Target value in each pattern of ARCDAT (C in Screen A)
Page 915 Chapter 16 COPIER<DISPLAY<HT-C Subheading Contents Level SUM-A-K Total control volume in each pattern of ARCDAT (K in Screen A) Setting range: -1023 to 1023 Standard value: 0 SUM-B-Y Total control volume in each pattern of ARCDAT (Y in Screen B) Setting range: -1023 to 1023 Standard value: 0 SUM-B-M...
Page 916: Copier List
Setting range: -1023 to 1023 Standard value: 0 DLTA-C-K Difference between the latest patch result and the target value in each pattern of ARCDAT (K in Screen C) Setting range: -1023 to 1023 Standard value: 0 16.2.1.2 COPIER List 0012-8309 imagePRESS C1 P 16-19...
Page 917 Chapter 16 1.VERSION T-16-22 COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading Contents Level Use it to indicate the ROM version of various PCBs (copier, accessories). - The format of display is as follows: if R-CON XX.YY>, XX: version; YY: R&D control number. - If no PCB is installed, the display will be as follows: <-:->. DC-CON ROM version of the DC controller PCB PANEL...
Page 918 Chapter 16 COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION Subheading Contents Level MEDIA-ZH Version of the simplified Chinese paper brand information MEDIA-SK Version of the Slovakian paper brand information MEDIA-TK Version of the Turkish paper brand information MEDIA-CS Version of the Czechoslovakian paper brand information MEDIA-EL Version of the Greek paper brand information MEDIA-ES Version of the Spanish paper brand information...
Page 919 Chapter 16 COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS Subheading Contents Level NETWARE Display the installation status of the NetWare firmware. 0: Not installed 1: Installed SEND Attachment status of the SEND function 0: SEND function not attached 1: SEND function attached PDL-FNC1 Display the available PDL. (1)b31: BDL b30: PS b29: PCL b28: PDL b27: LIPS b26: N201 b25: I5577 b24: ESC/P b23: HPGL b22: HPGL2 b21: IMAGING b20: KS b19 to 16: Reserve (This is going to be used when a PDL is newly added.) PDL-FNC2...
Page 920 Chapter 16 T-16-25 COPIER>DISPLAY>CST-STS Subheading Contents Level WIDTH-MF Use it to check the width of paper in the manual feed tray (in mm). 5.JAM F-16-14 Touch any Jam Indication screen to go to the detailed screen of that particular type of jam. [1] press to go to the previous page.
Page 921 Chapter 16 - <TIME1> Indicates the time of the jam in question. - <TIME2> Indicates the jam recovery time. - <L> Use it to indicate the location of jams. T-16-26 Cord Location/classification copier (Printer unit) feeder finisher - <CODE> Use it to indicate jam codes (Refer to Jam code list described later). - <P>...
Page 922 Chapter 16 Sensor Code Sensor type Remarks number xx0D reversal sensor PS14 when in face-down delivery mode xx0E outside delivery sensor PS13 xx0F reversal vertical path sensor PS15 xx10 vertical path 0 sensor PS31 when the source of paper is the right deck xx11 duplex left sensor PS17...
Page 923 Chapter 16 Code Sensor type Sensor notation Description 0007 delivery reversal sensor - if not in high-speed duplex mode, the delivery sensor does not detect when a feed of 132.1 mm has been made after paper has reached the leading edge downstream roller with respect to the activation of the read sensor.
Page 924 Chapter 16 7.HV-STS T-16-33 COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS Subheading Contents Level PRI-GRID Grid voltage of the primary charging assembly (Unit: V) PRE-TR Current level of the pre-transfer charging assembly (Unit: µA) BIAS DC value of each color developing bias (Unit: V) 1TR-CMOF Offset for adjustment of the primary transfer DC current monitor Setting range: -999 to 999(mv) 1TR-VMOF Offset for adjustment of the primary transfer DC voltage monitor...
Page 925 Chapter 16 COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT Subheading Contents Level P-LPW-Y/M/C/K Laser power value of Y/M/C/K color which is a target patch contrast electric potential 0 to FF (Unit: hex only) 9.DENS T-16-35 COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS Subheading Contents Level DENS-Y/M/C Calculated value of the developer density (Y/M/C) (The difference to the target value is displayed in %.) Reference The value is updated at the point when toner supply is performed after the main power switch was...
Page 926 Chapter 16 T-16-36 COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC Subheading Contents Level ENV-TR Environmental area Display the environmental area for transfer control based on the environment (temperature, humidity) in the printer. Setting value 1: Low humidity (5.8g or less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9g to 17.3g) 3: High humidity (17.4g or more) PP-S-REF REF value of the paper thickness detection sensor...
Page 927 Chapter 16 T-16-39 Location code Alarm code 02 scanner indicates the presence of dirt on the glass for stream reading. 0002 line correction alarm (upon detection of dust on the stream reading glass between originals) 0020 04 pickup/feed 0001 cassette 1 lifter error 0002 cassette 2 lifter error 0003...
Page 928 Chapter 16 T-16-41 COPIER<DISPLAY<HT-C Subheading Contents Level TGT-A-Y Target value in each pattern of ARCDAT (Y in Screen A) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 TGT-A-M Target value in each pattern of ARCDAT (M in Screen A) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 TGT-A-C Target value in each pattern of ARCDAT (C in Screen A)
Page 929 Chapter 16 COPIER<DISPLAY<HT-C Subheading Contents Level SUM-A-K Total control volume in each pattern of ARCDAT (K in Screen A) Setting range: -1023 to 1023 Standard value: 0 SUM-B-Y Total control volume in each pattern of ARCDAT (Y in Screen B) Setting range: -1023 to 1023 Standard value: 0 SUM-B-M...
Page 930: Copier List
Chapter 16 COPIER<DISPLAY<HT-C Subheading Contents Level SGNL-C-Y Latest patch result in each pattern of ARCDAT (Y in Screen C) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 SGNL-C-M Latest patch result in each pattern of ARCDAT (M in Screen C) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 SGNL-C-K...
Page 931 Chapter 16 T-16-42 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Subheading Contents Level Use it to indicate the ROM version of various PCBs (copier, accessories). - The format of display is as follows: if R-CON XX.YY>, XX: version; YY: R&D control number. - If no PCB is installed, the display will be as follows: <-:->.
Page 932 Chapter 16 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Subheading Contents Level MEDIA-TK Version of the Turkish paper brand information MEDIA-CS Version of the Czechoslovakian paper brand information MEDIA-EL Version of the Greek paper brand information MEDIA-ES Version of the Spanish paper brand information MEDIA-ET Version of the Esthonian paper brand information MEDIA-FI...
Page 933 Chapter 16 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Subheading Contents Level PCI1 Display the name of the board connected to PCII. 30 characters or less "-" (hyphen) is displayed when the board is not connected. - Voice board: - Encryption board: - GIGA Ethernet board: USBH-SPD Display the connection speed of the USB device.
Page 934 Chapter 16 F-16-18 Touch any Jam Indication screen to go to the detailed screen of that particular type of jam. [1] press to go to the previous page. [2] press to go to the next page. [3] indicates the order of occurrence of the jam in question. [4] indicates the type of jam.
Page 935 Chapter 16 - <CODE> Use it to indicate jam codes (Refer to Jam code list described later). - <P> Use it to indicate the source of paper. T-16-47 Code Description unable to specify cassette 1 cassette 2 cassette 3 cassette 4 not used not used side paper deck...
Page 936 Chapter 16 Sensor Code Sensor type Remarks number 0D90 transparency sensor (front, rear) PS3, PS29 when the mode is transparency mode 0D91 transparency sensor (front, rear) PS3, PS29 when the mode is not transparency mode 0D91 registration sensor when the mode is transparency mode 0D92 transparency sensor (front, rear) PS3, PS29...
Page 937 Chapter 16 Code Sensor type Sensor notation Description 0045 feed sensor 1st; not reaching the read sensor 0046 feed sensor 1st; stationary at the read sensor 0047 delivery reversal sensor 1st; not reaching heat delivery sensor 0048 delivery reversal sensor 1st;...
Page 938 Chapter 16 COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS Subheading Contents Level 1TR-VMOF Offset for adjustment of the primary transfer DC voltage monitor Setting range:-999 to 999(mv) 2TR-CMOF Offset for adjustment of the secondary transfer DC current monitor Setting range:-999 to 999(mv) 2TR-VMOF Offset for adjustment of the secondary transfer DC voltage monitor Setting range:-999 to 999(mv)
Page 939 Chapter 16 COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT Subheading Contents Level PVCONT-Y/M/C/K Current value of the target patch contrast potential (Y/M/C/K color) 0 to 255V (unit: V display only) [Checking point] Optical value: 30 to 40 If the value is out of optical renge, replace the potential sensor and laser scanner. P-LPW-Y/M/C/K To display the laser power value of Y/M/C/K color for target patch contrast potential 00 to FF (unit: Hex display only)
Page 940 Chapter 16 COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS Subheading Contents Level DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K Output value (current value) of target developing DC voltage (Y/M/C/K) [Checking point] Optical value: 250 to 700 If the value is out of optical renge, replace the charging assembly and potential sejsot D-CRNT-P/S Measured value of dark current at patch detection ATR control (P wave/S wave) [Checking point]...
Page 941 Chapter 16 T-16-57 COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC Subheading Contents Level ENV-TR Environmental area Display the environmental area for transfer control based on the environment (temperature, humidity) in the printer. Setting value 1: Low humidity (5.8g or less) 2: Normal humidity (5.9g to 17.3g) 3: High humidity (17.4g or more) PP-S-REF REF value of the paper thickness detection sensor...
Page 942 Chapter 16 Location code Alarm code 33 fan fixing heat discharge fan 0011 50 ADF indicates that the original separation alarm condition has occurred 3 times in sequence (i.e., faulty 0010 pickup of the 1st original). 61 finisher 0001 staple absent 62 saddle stitcher stitch staple absent 0001...
Page 943 Chapter 16 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C Subheading Contents Level TGT-B-Y Target value in each pattern of ARCDAT (Y in Screen B) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 TGT-B-M Target value in each pattern of ARCDAT (M in Screen B) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 TGT-B-C...
Page 944 Chapter 16 COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C Subheading Contents Level SGNL-A-K Latest patch result in each pattern of ARCDAT (K in Screen A) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 SGNL-B-Y Latest patch result in each pattern of ARCDAT (Y in Screen B) Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 SGNL-B-M...
Page 945: Feeder
16.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) 16.3.1 Overview 0011-9634 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ The COPIER > I/O screen and items (only items required for services in the field) are shown below. Display...
Page 946: Dc-Con>
P008 xxxxxxxx bit0 bit7 adress F-16-23 16.3.2 <DC-CON> 0011-9635 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ T-16-64 Address Name Symbol Remarks P001 Detection of 24V at side driver Detection of 24V Hopper shutter switch...
Page 947 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P003 Side driver 5V remote H: Sensor 5V on Pre-transfer wire cleaner motor 2 (bit10:bit11) (0:0)(1:1)=Stopped (0:1)=CW (outward), (1:0)=CCW (homeward) Transfer wire cleaner motor 1 Primary wire cleaner motor 2 (bit8:bit9) (0:0)(1:1)=Stopped (0:1)=CW (outward), (1:0)=CCW (homeward) Primary wire cleaner motor 1 Primary expiration FAN half H: Half speed on (Full speed at port5=H)
Page 948 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P006 Detection of locking of the primary expiration FAN L: Locked (synchronous rotation) Detection of locking of the transfer drum cleaner cooling L: Locked (synchronous rotation) Cartridge motor error LC L: Error Cartridge motor error LM L: Error Cartridge motor error K L: Error...
Page 949 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P009 DDI PPOWER L: POWER ON DDI versatile input DDI versatile input Reset via DDI L: RESET Signal of the use of the high-pressure board for MT L: High-pressure board for MT is used. Developing motor maker judgment bit L: Matsushita Detection of the switching of temperature control of the...
Page 950 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P012 Paper supply detection 1 for cassette 4 PS52 H: Paper is present. Paper supply detection 0 for cassette 4 PS51 H: Paper is present. Paper height sensor for cassette 4 PS50 L: Paper feeding position Limit sensor for cassette 4 PS48 H: Limit status...
Page 951 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P016 DCON version recognition bit 2 DCON version recognition bit 1 DCON version recognition bit 0 6-color recognition 1 6-color recognition 0 Voltage recognition bit 2 L:100V Voltage recognition bit 1 L:120V Voltage recognition bit 0 L:230V Output port for checking 7 H: On...
Page 952 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P020 VDSEL_B1(Moved from IMG1) VDSEL_B0(Moved from IMG1) VDSEL_A1(Moved from IMG1) VDSEL_A0(IMoved from IMG1) Cassette heater ON L: On Hard counter 1 CNT2 H: On Hard counter 0 CNT1 H: On TR1CONT reset signal L: Reset Electric potential sensor ON UN31 H: Charging...
Page 953 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P023 Detection of locking of the belt cooling fan 4 0: Normal, 1: Abnormal 0: Normal, 1: Abnormal Detection of locking of the belt cooling fan 3 0: Normal, 1: Abnormal 0: Normal, 1: Abnormal Detection of locking of the belt cooling fan 2 0: Normal, 1: Abnormal 0: Normal, 1: Abnormal...
Page 954 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P026 Two-sided right sensor <-- 0: Paper is absent, 1: Paper is present <-- Secondary transfer HP sensor <-- 0: **, 1: HP Post-transfer sensor <-- 0: Paper is absent, 1: Paper is present PS19 Two-sided feeder sensor <--...
Page 955 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P028 Belt cooling fan (center) Half 1:on 0:off 1:ON 0:OFF Belt cooling fan (center) Full 1:on 0:off 1:ON 0:OFF Belt cooling fan (edge) Half 1:on 0:0ff 1:ON 0:OFF Belt cooling fan (edge) Full 1:on 0:off 1:ON 0:OFF All sensors ON 0:OFF 1:ON...
Page 956 Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P032 WAKE order from DDI PLIVE_WAKE* Two-sided reverse motor drive pulse Used as a mode switching signal for function checking For factory checking Horizontal registration motor drive pulse SIDE_REGI_A Horizontal registration motor drive pulse SIDE_REGI_A* Horizontal registration motor drive pulse SIDE_REGI_B...
Page 957: R-Con>
Chapter 16 Address Name Symbol Remarks P039 Clock output(18.432MHz) CLK20 Reserve Read High write HWR* Low write LWR* Switching the finisher microcomputer FIN_MODE FIN_DOWNLO FIN_RESET P040 Build-in ROM (when downloading) FlashROM (in normal operation) CS0* Used for an address for FlashROM 2M bite or more CS1* CS2* GOHOME...
Page 958: Feeder>
Chapter 16 Indication Item Remarks Optical system home position sensor 1 when it is placed at HP LED for size detection Indefinite Board checking port This is usually 0. P007 ADF download mode (not used) ADF reset signal (not used) ADF download signal (not used) P008 ON signal of CCD...
Page 959 Chapter 16 Indication Item Remarks 24VP down detection This is usually 1. Trail edge detection sensor 0 when paper is absent Document detection sensor 0 when paper is absent Not used Not used Not used P005 Not used Not used Not used ADTRIG Indefinite value...
Page 960: Sorter>
Chapter 16 Indication Item Remarks Delivery flapper SL1 Indefinite value P012 DIPSW8 1 when the switch is turned on DIPSW7 1 when the switch is turned on DIPSW6 1 when the switch is turned on DIPSW5 1 when the switch is turned on DIPSW4 1 when the switch is turned on DIPSW3...
Page 961 Chapter 16 Address Controller Description Remarks P002 STACKER Punch feed motor phase A signal Punch feed motor phase B signal Punch feed motor phase A* signal Punch feed motor phase B* signal Tray motor CLK signal Swing locking motor current switch IO 0: ON Swing locking motor phase A signal Swing locking motor phase B signal...
Page 962 Chapter 16 Address Controller Description Remarks P011 STACKER Upper tray motor CW/CCW 1: CCW, 0: CW Upper tray motor ON 0: ON Upper tray motor LOCK 0: locked Solenoid ON signal 0: ON Not used lower tray motor CW/CCW 1: CCW, 0: CW Delivery path sensor 1: paper present P012...
Page 963 Chapter 16 Address Controller Description Remarks P020 STACKER Stapler shift motor current switch I0 0: ON Stapler shift motor current switch I1 0: ON No. 1 delivery motor shift solenoid 1: ON Buffer traling edge retaining solenoid 1: ON Stack edging lower roller clucth 1: ON Shutter open/close clutch 1: ON...
Page 964 Chapter 16 Address Controller Description Remarks P028 SADDLE Saddle front stapling current detection 1: detected Saddle rear stapling current detection 1: detected Saddle delivery door connection detection 1: detected Not used Saddle stapler unit connection detection 1: detected Not used P029 SADDLE Saddle rear staple detecting switch...
Page 965: Mn-Cont>
Trailing edge sensor P048 PUNCHER B5R sensor P049 PUNCHER A4R sensor P050 PUNCHER B4 sensor P051 PUNCHER DUST sensor P052 PUNCHER A3 sensor 16.3.6 <MN-CONT> 0011-9639 imagePRESS C1 P / imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ (Printer) / imagePRESS C1+ 16-68...
Page 966 Chapter 16 T-16-70 Address Item Remarks P001 Versatile input/output port (board O) Versatile input/output port (board S) Versatile input/output port (board R) Versatile input/output port (board P) Test packet issue request to image processing ASIC DDI-P POWER signal 0: ON Delivery count (control card, coin robo) 1: Delivery Paper feed count (control card, coin robo)
Page 967 Chapter 16 Address Item Remarks P005 Power Ready signal of OPEN interface Watch Dog function Watch Dog interruption clear DDI-S Livewake signal DDI-S Download signal DDI-P Likewake signal DDI-P Download signal For R&D P006 Version of the main controller PCB Version of the main controller PCB Version of the main controller PCB Version of the main controller PCB...
Page 968: Adjust (Adjustment Mode)
Chapter 16 Address Item Remarks P013 Not used P014 Not used P015 Not used P016 Not used 16.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) 16.4.1 COPIER 16.4.1.1 COPIER List 0011-9640 imagePRESS C1 1. ADJ-XY T-16-71 COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY Subheading Contents Level ADJ-X Adjust the position of the lead edge of the optical system image (the starting position to read the image in the sub scanning direction).
Page 969 Chapter 16 Decrease the setting (so that the read start position moves toward the rear). Read start position Increase the setting (so that the read start position moves Original toward the front). F-16-24 T-16-72 COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY Subheading Contents Level ADJ-Y-DF Adjust the main scanning position for DF stream reading. Adjustment method - When you increase the setting value by 1, the starting position to read the image moves to the front by 0.1mm.
Page 970 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY Subheading Contents Level ADJ-X-MG Make a fine adjustment of sub scanning magnification for reader copyboard reading. Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label. Adjustment range -50 to +50 [Factory setting value: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clear: 0]...
Page 971 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading Contents Level CCDU-RG Correction value of color registration between Red and Green in the sub scanning direction, which is dependent on the CCD unit Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label.
Page 972 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading Contents Level 50-RG Display an offset value of color registration (R-G) at BOOK mode / 50% reading. Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label. Setting range: -256 to 256 [Factory setting value: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clear: 0] When you changed the setting value for this item, write down the changed value in the service...
Page 973 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD Subheading Contents Level 100DF-RG Display an offset value of color registration (R-G) at ADF mode / 100% reading. Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label. Setting range: -256 to 256 [Factory setting value: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clear: 0] When you changed the setting value for this item, write down the changed value in the service...
Page 974 Chapter 16 3. LASER It is an adjustment item at the time of shipment; thus, it is not adjusted at the filed service. T-16-74 COPIER>ADJUST>LASER Subheading Contents Level PVE-OFST Offset from the center of laser (laser exposure position) Setting range: -600 to 600 [Factory setting value: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clear: 0] POWER Set the laser power when electric potential control is turned off.
Page 975 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG Subheading Contents Level REG2-V-M Make a coarse adjustment of the M color writing position in the sub scanning direction. (the second image of the two images aligned on ITB) Adjustment method - When you increase the value by 1, the pattern moves to the trail edge. - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label.
Page 976 Chapter 16 T-16-77 COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK Subheading Contents Level BLANK-T Enter an adjustment value for non-image width (lead edge). Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label. Adjustment range: 0 to 1000 [Factory setting value: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clear: 94] BLANK-L...
Page 977 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK Subheading Contents Level BLANK-C4 Set a lead edge margin for Cassette 4. Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label. Adjustment range: -35 to +35 [Factory setting value: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clear: 0] BLANK-PD...
Page 978 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL Subheading Contents Level OFSTPLM Not used OFSTPLC Not used OFSTP2Y Adjust the density at test print reading Keep the Y density adjustment value when test print reading was performed (Media 2) Adjustment range: -128 to +128 Standard value: 0 When replacing the reader controller, input the value written on the service label once again.
Page 979 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL Subheading Contents Level OFSTP3C Adjust the density at test print reading Keep the C density adjustment value when test print reading was performed (Media 3) Adjustment range: -128 to +128 Standard value: 0 When replacing the reader controller, input the value written on the service label once again. OFSTP3K Adjust the density at test print reading Keep the K density adjustment value when test print reading was performed (Media 3)
Page 980 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR Subheading Contents Level HD-OFS-Y/M/C/K Adjust the color balance of high-density area. (Y/M/C/K color) Adjustment range -8 to +8 [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] Use of this mode must be avoided as much as possible when the machine has been operating normally.
Page 981 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading Contents Level 2TR-SHR1 to 8 Set an offset value for the paper allocation voltage of the secondary transfer ATVC. Adjustment method When the product's operation mode matches the setting of TR-ENV, TR-PPR, TR-CLR, and TR- DUP, the paper allocation voltage of the secondary transfer ATVC is offset according to the setting value of this mode.
Page 982 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading Contents Level 1TR-TGY/M/C Adjust the target current offset for the primary transfer ATVC. (Y/M/C) Adjustment range: -10 - 10 (Unit: 1.0µA) [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] 1TR-TGK1 Adjust the target current offset for the primary transfer ATVC. (Bk: single color) Adjustment range: -10 - 10 (Unit: 1.0µA) [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] 1TR-TGK4...
Page 983 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ Subheading Contents Level ADJ-REFE Adjust the horizontal registration for double sided copy. (for factory use) Adjustment method When you increase the value, the second side image moves to the rear side. (When you increase the value by 1, the image moves by 0.1mm.) Adjustment range: -100 to 100 [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] BLK-SML2...
Page 984 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ Subheading Contents Level MF-A4 Enter the basic value of the paper width for the manual feed tray. (A4) Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label.
Page 985 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>MISC Subheading Contents Level ACS-CNT2 Adjust the count area of the chromatic color judgment pixels for ACS. Adjustment method When you increase the setting value, the judgment area becomes wider. Adjustment range -2 to +2 [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] REOS-PG Select a coefficient of Reos processing at 1200 dpi.
Page 986 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>P-PASCAL Subheading Contents Level CS1OFWIM Adjust the main unit offset of the solid white ideal brightness value M for Color Sensor Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 CS1OFDMM Adjust the main unit offset of the solid actual measurement brightness value M for Color Sensor 1. Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 CS1OFDMY...
Page 987: Copier List
Adjust the main unit offset of the solid white ideal brightness value Y for Color Sensor Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 16.4.1.2 COPIER List 0012-8316 imagePRESS C1 P 1. LASER It is an adjustment item at the time of shipment; thus, it is not adjusted at the filed service. T-16-88 COPIER>ADJUST>LASER...
Page 988 Chapter 16 T-16-89 COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG Subheading Contents Level REG-V-Y/K Make a coarse adjustment of the Y/K color writing position in the sub scanning direction. Adjustment method - When you increase the value by 1, the pattern moves to the trail edge. - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label.
Page 989 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>DENS Subheading Contents Level REF-Y/M/C Standard value of toner density signal (Y/M/C color) Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label. Adjustment range: 462 to 562 [Factory setting value: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clear: 512] P-SGNL-Y/M/C/K...
Page 990 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK Subheading Contents Level BLANK-C1 Set a lead edge margin for Cassette 1. Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label. Adjustment range: -35 to +35 [Factory setting value: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clear: 0] BLANK-C2...
Page 991 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT Subheading Contents Level VCONT-Y/M/C/K Adjust the target contrast electric potential (Y/M/C/K color). Adjustment method - The larger the setting value is, the darker the density is. Adjustment range: -30 to 30 (Unit: 1V) [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] Use of this mode must be avoided as much as possible when the machine has been operating normally.
Page 992 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR Subheading Contents Level LD-OFS-Y/M/C/K Adjust the color balance of low-density area. (Y/M/C/K color) Adjustment range -8 to +8 [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] Use of this mode must be avoided as much as possible when the machine has been operating normally.
Page 993 Chapter 16 T-16-96 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading Contents Level PRE-TR Set a current value of the pre-transfer charging assembly. (common to Y/M/C/K) Adjustment range: -120 to 0 (Unit: 5.0 uA) [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] 2TR-TGT1 to 8 Set an offset value for the target current value of the secondary transfer ATVC.
Page 994 Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR Subheading Contents Level TR-CLR1 to 8 Color mode setting items for the secondary transfer ATVC setting 1: Bk mode, 2: C mode [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 1] Reference: 6 items of 2TR-TGT, 2TR-SHR, TR-PPR, TR-ENV, TR-CLR, and TR-DUP are treated as one set.
Page 995 Chapter 16 10. FEED-ADJ T-16-97 COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ Subheading Contents Level REGIST Adjust the timing of turning ON the registration roller clutch. Adjustment method - When you increase the value by 1, the image moves toward the lead edge of the paper by 0.1mm. - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label.
Page 996 Chapter 16 T-16-99 COPIER>ADJUST>MISC Subheading Contents Level SEG-ADJ Adjust the separation level for characters and photos at the character/photo/map mode. Adjustment method - To make it easier to recognize a photo document, increase the setting value. - To make it easier to recognize a character document, decrease the setting value. Adjustment range: -4 to 4 [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] K-ADJ...
Page 997 Chapter 16 T-16-100 COPIER>ADJUST>EXP-LED Subheading Contents Level CLN-EXP Set a cleaner pre-exposure current. (image area) Set the light volume of cleaner pre-exposure for an image area at printing. Setting range 5 to 10 (Unit: 10mA) Standard value CLN-EXP2 Set the cleaner pre-exposure current. (color/paper internal) Set the light volume of cleaner pre-exposure for color/paper interval.
Page 998: Copier List
Chapter 16 COPIER>ADJUST>P-PASCAL Subheading Contents Level CS1OFHIY Adjust the main unit offset of the HT ideal brightness value Y for Color Sensor 1. Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 CS2OFDMK Adjust the main unit offset of the solid actual measurement brightness value K for Color Sensor 2. Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 CS2OFDMC...
Page 999 Chapter 16 T-16-102 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY Subheading Contents Level ADJ-X Adjust the position of the lead edge of the optical system image (the starting position to read the image in the sub scanning direction). Adjustment method - When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, decrease the setting value. - When the area outside of the document is copied, increase the setting value.
Page 1000 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY Subheading Contents Level ADJ-X-MG Make a fine adjustment of sub scanning magnification for reader copyboard reading. Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label.
Page 1001 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Subheading Contents Level 50-RG Display an offset value of color registration (R-G) at BOOK mode / 50% reading. Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label.
Page 1002 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Subheading Contents Level DFTAR-R Enter a shading target value (RED color) when DF is used (normal document reading position). Adjustment method - When an error occurred to an image (caused by dirt on the chart, etc.) after executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2, enter a factory measurement value using this mode.
Page 1003 Chapter 16 T-16-106 COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG Subheading Contents Level REG-V-Y/K Make a coarse adjustment of the Y/K color writing position in the sub scanning direction. Adjustment method - When you increase the value by 1, the pattern moves to the trail edge. - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the reader controller PCB or replaced the reader controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label.
Page 1004 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > DENS Subheading Contents Level SGNL-L Adjustment of toner density signal (L color) Initial valu Adjustment method - When you execute 'RAM clear' for the DC controller PCB or replace the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label. Adjustment range: 200 to 800 [Factory setting value / Value after the execution of RAM Clear: 512] REF-L...
Page 1005 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK Subheading Contents Level BLANK-C3 Set a lead edge margin for Cassette 3. Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the main controller PCB or replaced the SRAM PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label. Adjustment range: -35 to +35 [Factory setting value: Factory adjustment value / Value after RAM clear: 0] BLANK-C4...
Page 1006 Chapter 16 T-16-110 COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL Subheading Contents Level OFST-P-Y/M/C/K Adjust the offset for the test print reading signal (Y/M/C/K color) at PASCAL control for automatic gradation correction (full correction). Adjustment method - When you set a larger value, the image density after automatic gradation correction (full correction) becomes darker.
Page 1007 Chapter 16 T-16-111 COPIER > ADJUST > COLOR Subheading Contents Level ADJ-Y/M/C/K Adjust the color balance for users. (Y/M/C/K color) Adjustment method - When you set a larger value, the image density becomes darker. - When you set a smaller value, the image density becomes lighter. Adjustment range: -8 to +8 [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] OFST-Y/M/C/K...
Page 1008 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Subheading Contents Level 2TR-SHR1 to 8 Set an offset value for the paper allocation voltage of the secondary transfer ATVC. Adjustment method When the product's operation mode matches the setting of TR-ENV, TR-PPR, TR-CLR, and TR- DUP, the paper allocation voltage of the secondary transfer ATVC is offset according to the setting value of this mode.
Page 1009 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Subheading Contents Level Set a bias value of the secondary transfer static eliminator. Adjustment method After monitoring is performed to the bias value by DISPLAY<HV-STS<2EL, set a bias value using this mode. Setting range: -4000 to 0 (Unit: V) [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] 1TR-STS1 Offset value of the target current for the primary transfer paper interval (at constant speed)
Page 1010 Chapter 16 13. CST-ADJ T-16-115 COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ Subheading Contents Level MF-A4R Enter the basic value of the paper width for the manual feed tray. (A4R) Adjustment method - When you executed 'RAM clear' for the DC controller PCB or replaced the DC controller PCB, enter the value indicated in the service label.
Page 1011 Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > MISC Subheading Contents Level ACS-CNT2 Adjust the count area of the chromatic color judgment pixels for ACS. Adjustment method When you increase the setting value, the judgment area becomes wider. Adjustment range: -2 to +2 [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] REOS-PG Select a coefficient of Reos processing at 1200 dpi.
Page 1012: Feeder
Chapter 16 COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL Subheading Contents Level CS1OFHIY Adjust the main unit offset of the HT ideal brightness value Y for Color Sensor 1. Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 CS2OFDMK Adjust the main unit offset of the solid actual measurement brightness value K for Color Sensor 2. Setting range: 0 to 1023 Standard value: 0 CS2OFDMC...
Page 1013 Chapter 16 FEEDER>ADJSUT Subheading Contents Level DOCST-M Adjust the document stop position when a feeder is used. (for manual feeding) Setting range -7 to +7 (Unit: 0.5mm) Remarks The procedure to adjust positions is shown below. When each item is executed, the machine feeds the paper set on the feeder document tray and stops it on the copyboard glass.
Page 1014: Sorter
Chapter 16 16.4.3 SORTER 16.4.3.1 SORTER List 0011-9643 imagePRESS C1 / imagePRESS C1+ T-16-120 SORTER>ADJUDT Subheading Contents Level PNCH-HLE Adjust the length between the paper edge and the position of a punched hole. Setting range -4 to 2 [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: 0] 16.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode) 16.5.1 COPIER 16.5.1.1 COPIER List...
Page 1015 Chapter 16 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL Subheading Contents Level INISET-Y/M/C Initial installation of the Y/M/C color developer Simultaneously execute a series of operation required for initial installation of the Y/M/C color developer. Operation method 1) Select an item to highlight it and press the OK key. - Start the operation.
Page 1016 Chapter 16 COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL Subheading Contents Level RGW-ADR Specify a URL for a sales company's server used for E-RDS. [Factory setting value / Value after RAM clear: https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010] INISET-4 Automatic initial setting mode for installation of the main unit Simultaneously execute a series of operation required for initial installation of each color developer.
Page 1017 Chapter 16 T-16-122 COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER Subheading Contents Level POWER Turn on the laser output for laser power adjustment. Pressing an item highlights it. Pressing the OK key starts the operation. Press the Stop key to turn it off. 3. DPC T-16-123 COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC Subheading Contents...
Page 1018 Chapter 16 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING Subheading Contents Level WIRE-EX Clean the primary charging wire / pre-transfer charging wire. (one round trip) Regular cleaning of the charging wire is performed for five round trips (cleaning period: approx. 2 minutes). In this mode, cleaning of the charging wire is performed for one round trip (cleaning period: approx.
Page 1019 Chapter 16 7. PANEL T-16-127 COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL Subheading Contents Level LCD-CHK Check the blank dot area in the LCD display. Operation method 1) Select this item and press the OK key to start operation. The front side of the touch panel lights in white - black - red - green - blue colors in order repeatedly.
Page 1020 Chapter 16 COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading Contents Level CL-ON Start checking the operation of a clutch. Operation method 1) Select an item and press the OK key. ON/OFF operation is repeated in the following pattern. ON for 0.5 seconds --> OFF for 5 seconds --> ON for 0.5 seconds --> OFF for 5 seconds --> OFF Specify a fan to be checked.
Page 1021 Chapter 16 COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading Contents Level Specify a motor to be checked. (Range: 1 to 55) Operation method 1) Select this item. 2) Enter the code of a motor using numeric keys. 1. M1: Polygon motor 2. M2: Drum / ITB motor 3.
Page 1022 Chapter 16 COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK Subheading Contents Level SL-ON Start the solenoid operation. Operation method 1) Select this item and press the OK key. ON/OFF operation is repeated in the following pattern. ON for 0.5 seconds --> OFF for 5 seconds --> ON for 0.5 seconds --> OFF for 5 seconds --> OFF 9.
Page 1023 Chapter 16 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading Contents Level MN-CON RAM clear for the SRAM board of the main controller PCB Operation method 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power. - The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. - When this mode is executed, all the data in the SRAM board is initialized.
Page 1024 Chapter 16 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR Subheading Contents Level CA-KEY Perform batch deletion of the CA certificate and key pair. When a serviceman replaces or disposes of a device, he/she must perform batch deletion of the CA certificate and key pair. The CA certificate is used by MEAP application which uses E-RDS, and SSL client connection.

This manual is also suitable for:

Imagepress c1 Imagepress c7000 series

Canon imagePRESS C1 P Service Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 2 Installation

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System

Chapter 4 Main Controller

Chapter 7 Image Formation

Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System

Chapter 16 Service Mode

Chapter 9 Fixing System

Chapter 6 Laser Exposure

Quick Links

Service Manual

Related Manuals for Canon imagePRESS C1 P

Summary of Contents for Canon imagePRESS C1 P